Home

ZyXEL Communications X6004 Telephone User Manual

1. LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit administrator profile Password Type a new password for this administrator account You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters Spaces are not allowed Confirm Retype the new password for this administrator account Password Description Type a short description for this administrator account You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters Spaces are allowed Rank Select the rank you want this administrator account to have You can select Full admin to allow this account to perform all configuration changes on the X6004 Debug admin to allow this account to perform all configuration changes on the X6004 This type of account is reserved for use by service technicians Read only to allow this account to only be able to view configuration details on the X6004 Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes X6004 User s Guide Diagnostics This chapter shows you how to collect diagnostic information and capture network traffic for analysis from the X6004 29 1 Diagnostics Overview The X6004 comes with advanced diagnostic tools to help a service technician troubleshoot problems or simply to ensure that everything is running smoothly on the X6004 This section describes how to collect the information from the X6004 and gives a brief description on the information you collect You ca
2. 226 Chapter 26 DUSIEIPEBE Bn o ond rte T N nied buscar CAL E E ET E weenie A 229 X6004 User s Guide Table of Contents 25 1 Syste Log LOVIPHIW aenssxieeqirepeta ape MU Rabb UE ERE AUR ER UA RR AS SESU i ansdagraanannasa tiie 229 Pe E dri rr E E TENA EST OT 230 20 21 Filter Log RESUS sares nnani A ai S 231 AOT O aaa AS 232 PO ee LOO nma cm 233 26 3 2 System Log CONNGUPAUON deccetsrcacscesstsrssiccevegstessetersesadecusegsiacensgeseateinrgessieuegenyeees 234 26 9 3 Edit Syslog Server Settings iussu ccaneestss canaaauascenanaetsn scangduas X9 YA ELEM B dba XR AE EAE KM 236 Chapter 27 Call Detail Record CDI us iom Ch RERE ERI RARO aaan RH UD AFIN QNI T QE und MEE 239 ArI GDR EEUU M 239 27 UI Local COR DataBase Mee 239 27 1 2 CDR Database Management via MySQL eese intrent thhenan 239 21 2 CDR Management Sereen MT 240 2ra BACKUP List SCEO MR a T aa a aA Ea 241 ZA COR OUO OOOO aeina 242 27A 1 COR Raport SCOOT piaia AE A AANA 244 Chapter 28 eu aE La e T E E SERE T E A E E E MERC teams ee 245 C WEIL urge aspin nin EE E AR 245 28 2 Administrator ACCOUN SOPOT auus tactique eusid dinini ede EeEpl danii aan aa EAE aiaei din egte darp Eis 245 203 Administrator Lor OPO aperin ean aIia 0 TT 246 20 2 1 Add an AOmIIBIFSIOr ria EN EE ENDE HM RENE 247 25 3 2 Editan Administrator ACCOUNT die npe RU nda arta eh Ee e oda d ea e ent 248 Chapter 29 Pele Se NRI
3. 96 Figure 84 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXO sse 97 Figure 85 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXS sse 98 Figure 86 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block 99 Figure 87 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block gt Black List 100 Figure 88 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Feature Code 101 Figure 89 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision seeeee 104 Figure 90 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit sssss 105 Figure 91 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Advanced 106 Figure 92 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt QOS eeeescsseseecece imei 109 Figure 93 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Voice Mail eeeeee 112 Figure 94 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook sssenn 114 Figure 95 Import Phonebook SOGE ssississinsssissriciaaniii iani EEn AEA E N ES 115 Figure 96 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt LDAP Phonebook 116 Figure 9
4. STANDARD DESCRIPTION Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A X6004 User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet 1s an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a poss
5. LABEL DESCRIPTION Logs Show Filter Click this button to filter the logs you want to view The screen changes to the one shown in Section 26 2 1 on page 231 Display Select a category of logs to view select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Setting page Refer to Section 26 1 on page 229 for more information on log categories Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e mail address specified in the Log Setting page see Section 26 3 on page 232 Refresh Click Refresh to renew the log screen Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all logs Total logging This field displays the total number of log entries on the X6004 entries entries per page Select the total number of messages that you want to display on one page Page This field displays which page of the log you are currently viewing It is in current page total pages format In other words 1 4 means that you are viewing the first page of a four page log file X6004 User s Guide Chapter 26 System Log Table 104 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Left Right Click the Left button to view the previous log page or click the Right button to view the next log page This field displays a sequential number of the log Time This field displays the time the log was recorded See Sec
6. X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator Table 9 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Intranet Use this screen to specify IP subnets for which the X6004 routes IP phones to a ZyStack member Status Use this screen to check the status of peer X6004s Monitor These screens allow you to view the status of your X6004 or if you set up a ZyStack you can view the status of all the participating X6004s System Use this screen to view network configuration hardware information line and Information license settings on the X6004 Status Use these screens to view status details about extensions and outbound line Observation groups configured on the X6004 SIP Peer Use this screen to view status information about SIP extensions configured on the X6004 FXS Peer Use this screen to view status information about FXS extensions configured on the X6004 FXO Peer Use this screen to view status information about FXO outbound line groups configured on the X6004 SIP Trunk Use this screen to view status information about SIP outbound line groups configured on the X6004 Logs Use these screens to view system logs configure log settings and search the CDR Call Detail Record database System Logs Use these screens to view and configure system logs on the X6004 CDR Use these screens to manage CDR collection and to query the CDR database Administration Use these scre
7. Alert Check the enable checkbox if you want the X6004 to send an email alert to the e mail address specified in the E mail Address field when the CDR file is half full Aged File Specify how to deal with CDR files when they are full Choose mail to admin to send the CDR file to the e mail address specified in the E mail Address field or drop to delete the file from the system E mail Address Type the e mail address to which you want to send the alerts indicating that the CDR file is half full This is also the e mail address to which complete CDR files are sent when they are full reach approximately 20000 records Database Location Use this section to specify the location and login credentials for a MySQL server that collects the CDR information from the X6004 Remote Server Check the Remote Server box and the X6004 sends a record of each call to the remote MySQL server you specify in the Server field Uncheck this box if you do not want to use a remote server to collect the CDR information X6004 User s Guide Chapter 27 Call Detail Record CDR Table 110 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Type the IP address or the domain name of the server to which you want to send your CDR files Then type the port number on which the remote server receives records of telephone calls from the X6004 Username Type the username of the account set up on a remote ser
8. Machine ID This field displays the ID of the X6004 on which a group is configured Group Name This field displays the name of a group authority group or an outbound line group Description This field displays the description of this group Associations Click the Advanced icon to configure links for an authority or an outbound line group 21 2 1 Edit Group Management Associations Use this screen to configure links from an authority group or an outbound line group to authority groups LCRs or ring groups configured on the X6004 To access this screen click the advanced icon next to the group you want to configure in the Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management screen X6004 User s Guide Chapter 21 Group Management Figure 178 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management gt Advanced Group Management Accessible Group List Group Name default Group Name escriptio Group Type Associations ezout easy to call out LCR Iv local call local call LCR LCR D long distance call long distance call LCR LCR Lr international call international call LCR LCR DL Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 81 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Accessible Group The table below shows which links you can create from the group authority group List or outbound line group identified in the Group Name field above
9. sse 196 ED CEN ERSa ce rsaPbeepnpUr EMU rr m 198 Figure 180 Conference Roon LIST ent 200 Figure 181 Conference Room Add ouai et or ek Vea pain eap etin span ch Vaan ak Rn Kn p a Sarna Send 201 Foue 1S E sot 202 i To CSU RING enssins 203 3501 20 Pole lo ER 203 Figure 185 Call Parking OVGIview M 204 igure Tob Cal Faking LOBO AUDI 556 Lr da d eto atia ated rb o d tud 205 gs rea rie eei NOE een 208 Figure 193 e ecran Aem 208 Figure 189 Configuration gt ZyStack gt Setting L2uicecece enira eaten n Rb LR lh dn n rt GR E e c 209 PVCS TO rie doge e m 209 Fite TS ey tr 4 xem 210 Figure 192 Internal Call ROB coser ucc E e ERE Kk natant emit tad o d vp Adobe a Ebr bi e EUR REA La dd Eds 211 Figure 193 Internal Call ster e 212 FOWE TA aK NUTO A 212 Figure To AS aek Ad aE nN 213 Figure 196 2yStHOK SiS saina aiina i aai 214 Figure 197 Monitor gt System Information iiie iesu ener ern rna rna nu rn RE ER PRA Rau XR RA A a e aA m 219 Figure 198 Monitor gt Status Observation SIP PSI Loscsiseteiee s ceemi e eua pti viec nte lee cr repe cu Ep VEA EE ERR 223 Figure 199 Monitor gt Status Observation gt FXS Peer eese eene antenna nna nt
10. LABEL DESCRIPTION Description This field displays the description for this authority group Add Advanced Click Edit Delete Add to create a new authority group Advanced to configure authority group settings Edit to change the name or description of the authority group Delete to remove this authority group from the X6004 14 2 1 Extension Query Result Screen The following screen appears when you click Query in the Authority Group screen This screen displays the results of your extension query Figure 104 Extension Query Result Authority Group Query Result Extension Number Group Name SIP Auth User Name Type Description 2222 default 2222 SIP 2222 Exit Back to Authority Group Each field is described in the following table Table 37 Extension Query Result LABEL DESCRIPTION Query Result Extension This field displays the extension number that you searched for on the X6004 Group Name This field displays the authority group to which this extension belongs SIP Auth User This field displays the user name associated with the SIP account for this Name extension Type This field displays SIP if this extension is a SIP account or FXS if this extension is associated with an analog phone connected to an FXS port on the X6004 Description This field displays the description given to this extension Edit Click this to go to t
11. 6 5 NTP Network Time Protocol Configuration Use this screen to configure time settings on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt Network gt NTP Figure 78 Configuration gt Network gt NTP NTP Current Time and Date Current Time hh mm ss 14 81 28 Current Date yyyy mm dd 2007 or A Time and Date Setup C Manual New Time hh mm ss New Date yyyy mm dd Get from Time Server Time Server Address 1 0 pool ntp org Time Server Address 2 1 pool ntp org Time Zone Setup Time Zone GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore Taipei Enable Daylight saving Start Date S z M a z of Ij at if hours End Date Offset Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 15 Configuration gt Network gt NTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Time and This section displays the current date and time Date Time and Date Setup Manual Select this if you want to specify the current date and time in the fields below New Time Enter the new time in this field and click Apply New Date Enter the new date in this field and click Apply Get from Time Server Select this if you want to use a time server to update the current date and time in the X6004 Time Server Address 1 2 Enter the IP address or URL of your time server Check with your ISP or network administrator if you are unsure of this information Tim
12. ATA device Select this if the ZyXEL device to which you are sending this configuration file is an ATA device An ATA Analog Telephone Adapter device typically has multiple analog telephones connected to it and can have unique configuration files for each port that it supports Port No Specify the ATA s phone port number that you want to create this configuration file for Set Profile Click Set Profile to create the configuration file and return to the Auto Provision screen Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the Auto Provision screen without saving any changes 8 2 2 Auto Provision View SPTGEN Use this screen to view the configuration file SPTGEN file for a specific extension To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision and click the Advanced icon next to the extension for which you want to view the SPTGEN file Figure 91 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Advanced View SPTGEN 980198001 SIP 98 Avtive 0 No 1 Yes 980198002 SIP 98 Server Address 192 168 1 12 980198003 SIP 98 Server Port lt 1024 65535 gt 5060 980198004 SIP 98 Registartion Server IP 192 168 1 12 980198005 SIP 98 Registartion Server Port lt 1024 65535 gt 5060 980198006 SIP 98 Registartion Expire Time lt 2 65535 gt 60 980198012 SIP 98 UserId 1111 980198013 SIP 98 Password 1111
13. LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This field displays page Description This field displays the description for this page group Add Edit Delete Click Add to create a new page group Edit to configure the settings of a page group Delete remove an existing page group Hunt Use this section to manage hunt groups Delete Check the Delete box es and click Delete to remove hunt groups Entry Number This field displays the number you have to dial to call the extensions in this hunt group Type This field displays hunt Description This field displays the description for this hunt group Add Edit Delete Click Add to create a new hunt group Edit to configure the settings of a hunt group Delete remove an existing hunt group 15 2 4 Add Edit Page Group Screen The screens for editing or adding page groups on the X6004 contain the same fields Only the screen used to add page groups is shown below Click the Add or Edit icon in the Paging section of the Ring Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown Figure 125 Add Edit Page Group Extensions Entry os Number Docs Pincode 0 9 Max Pagin E PM 10 3600 sec Description gt g ai Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 55 Add Edit Page Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry Number Type the number yo
14. Delete X6004 User s Guide Chapter 20 LCR Each field is described in the following table Table 78 LCR Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION LCR Data LCR Name Type a short name to identify this outbound dialing rule LCR You can use letters a z A Z numbers 0 9 and the underscore character Spaces are not allowed Description Type a short description for this outbound dialing rule LCR You can use printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Max Call Time Leave this field blank if you don t want to limit the duration of outgoing calls that use this outbound dialing rule LCR Alternatively enter the number of seconds 1 99999 to which you want to limit the duration of outgoing calls that use this outbound dialing rule LCR Outbound Line Group Use this section to add or remove outbound line groups from this outbound dialing rule LCR Add an outbound line group to this LCR Highlight an outbound line group in the Pool column by clicking on it and then click the Right button to move it to the Selected column Remove an outbound line group from this LCR Highlight an outbound line group in the Selected column by clicking on it and then click the Left button to move it to the Pool column If the LCR contains multiple outbound line groups you can use the Up and Down buttons to specify the priority of the outbound line groups Highlight an outbound line
15. Figure 12 Add Edit Authority Group Add Authority Group Machine ID fiPPBX_001 z Group Name Pasic Description Ada Cancel 3 The new authority group displays in the following screen Now you will add SIP extensions to the authority group Click the new authority group s Advanced icon Figure 13 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group Authority Group Extension Number Query Description a ce IPPBX 001 Basic 4 The following screen displays Click Add SIP Peers to configure multiple SIP accounts at the same time Figure 14 Authority Group Configuration Peer List Group Name Basic Description Add SIP Peers J Delete Add B Edit Delete Delete Add B Edit Delete E a a E a dus ETT 5 Configure the screen as shown next The SIP extension number and any configured SIP Auth Password prefix and or postfix make up the SIP password The SIP password must be at least four digits This example uses ten four digit SIP extensions 1001 1010 that are also used as the SIP usernames The SIP passwords are comprised of the combination of Prefix Extension Postfix In this example the SIP Auth Password X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Prefix value is 11 and the Postfix value is 99 The SIP username for extension 1001 is 1001 and the SIP password for this extension is 11100199 You do not nee
16. extension outbound to view calls from within your organization made to the outside world via one of the outbound lines outbound extension to view calls from the outside world to extensions configured on the X6004 outbound outbound to view calls that come in from an outbound line and are routed back to the outside world via another outbound line Call Time Call time is the time from when a caller finishes dialing a number until one of the parties hangs up Enter the range of seconds minutes or hours to specify the length of calls that you want to search for If you leave this field blank then the length of the call will not be considered as a search criterion in other words calls of all length duration are displayed unless limited by other search criteria Talk Time Talk time is the time from when a callee picks up an incoming call until one of the parties hangs up Enter the range of seconds minutes or hours to specify the length of calls that you want to search for If you leave this field blank then the length of the call will not be considered as a search criterion in other words calls of all length duration are displayed unless limited by other search criteria Caller Group Type the name of the authority group or outbound line group for which you want to search the call detail record Use the drop down listbox to choose Totally Match if you want to display only call records that exactly match the c
17. 22 2 1 Emergency Call Configuration Use this screen to manage emergency call numbers on the X6004 Click Configuration gt PBX gt Call Settings gt Call Emergency to view the following screen Figure 179 Emergency Call Configuration Emergency Call Dutbound Line List Outbound Line Pool Selected Outbound Line IPPBX 001 itsp IPPBX_001 SlotB_Portt gt IPPBX _001 SlotB_Port2 E IPPBX 001 SlotB Port3 g IPPBX_001 SlotB_Port4 zi ha Apply Cancel Emergency Numbers Delete Add Bf Edit fil Del _ Emergency Numbers m r 911 BP ul Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 Emergency Call Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Outbound Line Use this section to specify which outside line groups should be used for emergency List calls Outbound Line Highlight an outside line group in the Outbound Line Pool column and click the Pool Selected right arrow to select this outside line group for emergency call use Outbound Line Highlight an outside line group in the Selected Outbound Line column and click the left arrow to remove this outside line group from emergency call use X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services Table 83 Emergency Call Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Edit Highlight an outside channel and click the edit icon to add a prefix which should be appended to emergency calls when using this outside line Exp
18. Appendix B Open Software Announcements BS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the PHP Group The PHP Group can be contacted via Email at group php net For more information on the PHP Group and the PHP project please see lt http www php net gt This product includes the Zend Engine freely available at lt http www zend com gt The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE This Product includes Netkit Telnet 0 17 software under the Netkit Telnet License Netkit Telnet License Copyright c 1989 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and u
19. See Chapter 10 on page 111 for more information on the voicemail feature and Section 7 5 on page 100 for information on how to configure the feature code for voicemail this is the number you have to dial to listen to your voicemail messages via your handset Figure 235 VR Voicemail Voicemail Remove Forwarded Voicemail X6004 User s Guide 279 Chapter 33 Interactive Voice Response IVR System X6004 User s Guide PART VI Appendices amp Index Product Specifications 283 IP Addresses and Subnetting 287 Open Software Announcements 297 Legal Information 317 Customer Support 321 Index 327 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the X6004 s hardware and firmware features Table 133 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable 438 mm W x 309 mm D x 66 mm H Weight 5 6 Kg Power Specification One Backup Power Supply BPS connector 120W 12 V DC AC 100 240 VAC 50 60Hz 1 5A max internal universal power supply Interfaces LAN 10 100 Base Tx ports WAN 10 100 Base Tx ports Auto negotiation Auto MDIX One console port Expansion Slots 4 expansion slots with support for the following interface cards 4 port FXO interface card 4 port FXS interface card Combination 2 port FXS 2 port FXO interface card with lifeline support calls can be made to the PSTN in case
20. Send Log to Send Alert to Schedule When Full Mail Server Mail Subject Send From Send Log to Send Alert to Schedule When Full Server Address Log Facility Local 1 Active Log Summary Apply Each field is described in the following table Table 106 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION This is an index number identifying the system and remote log servers Name This field displays the name of the log servers System Log is the name of the internal log server and Remote Server 1 through 4 are the external syslog servers Log Format This field displays Internal for the system log and Syslog for the remote log servers Summary This field summarizes the settings you configured for the log servers Click the Edit icon in the Modify column to change any of the settings that are displayed Modify The lightbulb in this field is displayed as glowing green when the corresponding log server is activated The lightbulb is displayed as grayed out when the corresponding log server is not activated Click the Edit icon to configure log settings for the system log or one of the external syslog servers Active Log Click the Active Log Summary button to view and edit the categories the X6004 Summary logs in the internal and external log servers Apply Click the Apply button to save your changes to the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 26
21. This drop down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E mail Daily Weekly Hourly When Log is Full None If you select Weekly or Daily specify a time of day when the E mail should be sent If you select Weekly then also specify which day of the week the E mail should be sent If you select When Log is Full an alert is sent when the log fills up If you select None no log messages are sent Day for Sending Log Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs Time for Sending Log Enter the time of the day in 24 hour format for example 23 00 equals 11 00 pm to send the logs SMTP SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Authentication Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled you will not receive the e mail logs User Name Enter the user name up to 31 characters usually the user name of a mail account Password Enter the password associated with the user name above Active Log and Alert Log Category This column displays the source of log events that you can record on the X6004 The categories are All Logs all logs generated on the X6004 IPPBX all activities related to the PBX functions of the X6004 For example a an
22. Write down the administrator password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the X6004 to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the X6004 You could simply restore your last configuration 1 4 LEDs The figure below shows the LEDs on the X6004 Figure 4 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs Table 1 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The X6004 is turned on Off The X6004 is off SYS Green Blinking The X6004 is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The X6004 is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the X6004 is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The X6004 is functioning normally HDD Green Blinking The X6004 is writing to the hard disk On The hard drive is installed and recognized by the X6004 Off The X6004 does not have a hard drive installed Interface Card LEDs SYS Green On The interface card is functioning properly Off The interface card is not recognized by the X6004 FXS 1 4 Green On The line is in use Off The line is not in use FXO 1 4 Green On The line is connected and recei
23. upgrading firmware 255 V Voice over Internet Protocol see VolP 34 voicemail 35 email notifications 35 settings 271 voicemail feature code 63 VolP 34 VolP account sample 56 VoIP gateways 34 W WAN 86 and PPPoE 86 88 89 96 105 143 warranty 318 note 319 web configurator 35 75 getting help 84 home 77 login 75 logout 83 navigation 77 navigation panel 78 web phone 265 272 web portal 265 account settings 266 blacklist 271 call forward and blocking 267 find me list 270 FXS restrictions 266 login 265 voicemail 271 web phone 272 X6004 User s Guide Index white list 269 weight 283 white list 267 269 www dyndns org 87 X X6004 registration 260 Z Z Interface 209 ZendEngine 312 ZyStack 207 advantages 207 call routing 211 failover mode 207 intranet setup 212 master 209 requirements 207 role 209 settings 209 slave 209 status 213 ZyXEL End User License 313 X6004 User s Guide 333 Index X6004 User s Guide
24. Blind Forward Busy Forward No Answer Forward After Office Hours Call Blocking Setting Black list Block the calls without Caller ID Sun wv Mon v Tue 4 Wed v Thu W Fri Time 09 00 v 17 x 30 v Disable Enable White List Disable Enable Extension Number Disable Enable Extension Number Disable Enable Find Me List Disable Enable Extension Number Disable e Enable Black List Disable Enable Apply Reset Voice Mail Voice Mail Sat Voice Mail Voice Mail Voice Mail The following table shows the example call setting information You can also use this table to make a note of the call settings you want to configure if you like Table 5 Tutorial Call Settings EXAMPLE INFORMATION YOUR INFORMATION Office Hours Monday Friday 09 00 17 30 Do Not Disturb no one can call you except for people on the White List Disable White List people who can still call you when Do Not Disturb is on 555 123456 555 234567 555 345678 555 456789 Call Forwarding whether or not incoming calls are redirected and where they are sent Blind Forward Disable Busy Forward Voicemail No Answer Forward Find Me List After Office Hours Voicemail Find Me List 987 other extensions where you might be 654 found 324 Black List 555 999888 people you don t want to call you at all 555 888777 Block Calls Without Call
25. LABEL DESCRIPTION QoS Select the QoS method you want to use to mark outgoing frames on the X6004 You can choose TOS and then select one of the four classes of service supported on the X6004 minimize delay maximize throughput maximize reliability or minimize cost DS DiffServ and then select the DSCP value to mark the outgoing packets You can choose one of the AF Assured Forwarding EF Expedited Forwarding or one of the CS Class Selector values User Define and then enter a value to assign to the ToS field in decimal notation You can set the value to a value from 0 to 255 The X6004 displays the value you enter in hexadecimal notation None if you do not want to mark the ToS field of the outgoing VoIP packets Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Chapter 9 QoS X6004 User s Guide Voice Mail This chapter shows you how to set up auto provisioning for the SIP clients of the X6004 10 1 Voice Mail Overview BS Voice mail messages on the X6004 are stored on the built in flash memory of the X6004 To ensure that one user does not utilize a disproportionate amount of voice mail capacity you can limit the voice mail resources on a per user basis Another way to manage your voice mail messages is to forward them to email accounts associated with each telephone ext
26. NTP License 303 X6004 User s Guide Index O office hours 268 and hunt group 150 online services center 259 open software announcements 297 OpenLDAP License 306 OpenSSL license 304 outbound call routing 39 outbound line group 56 163 management 164 outbound line groups 37 50 191 and codecs 169 and LCRs 163 194 and ring groups 194 management 193 trusted peer 171 types 163 outside connections types of 163 outside lines 163 P packet capture 250 page group 145 148 and group management 153 example 150 parking lot extension 204 PBX 33 peer IP PBX 34 PHP License 311 pickup group 155 156 power specification 283 PPP License 302 PPPoE and WAN 86 88 89 96 105 143 product registration 319 PSTN 38 163 connection 49 PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network 33 Public Switched Telephone Network see PSTN 33 Q QoS 107 R rank of accounts 247 read only admin 245 Real Time Transport Protocol 95 reboot 83 record of calls 242 recording audio files 177 register IP telephones IP telephones registration 45 registering your X6004 260 registration at myZyXEL com 259 product 319 related documentation 3 reset button 83 resetting 83 restarting 83 restore configuration 253 restoring configuration 83 restrictions on extensions 160 RFC 1889 95 ring differentiation 202 ring groups and authority groups 192 and outbound line groups 194 configuration 145 creating 146
27. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 ZyStack Status LABEL DESCRIPTION ZyStack Status This table displays the X6004s participating in the ZyStack and their current status List Machine ID This field displays the system name of the X6004 The system name is automatically assigned to the X6004 based on when it was added to the ZyStack IPPBX 01 is always the master followed by slaves IPPBX 02 IPPBX 03 and so on Description This field displays the description of this ZyStack member Type This field displays the role this X6004 performs in the ZyStack The options are Master controls configuration on all the other X6004s Slave all configuration is done on the slave from the master X6004 Ping Click a Ping button to test IP connectivity with one member of the ZyStack or click Ping All to test IP connectivity with all members of the ZyStack This field displays N A when this function is not available for a specified X6004 This field displays Ok if you have a network connection from the master to the slave X6004 Delete This field displays the reason for not being able to delete an X6004 from the ZyStack The field displays Timeout if the master X6004 was unable to establish a connection with the X6004 that you wanted to remove from the ZyStack Wrong Master if the X6004 is already a member of another ZyStack Wrong Slave if the serial number did not match when removing this X6004 from the Z
28. administrator activity such as a successful login myZyXEL com service registration with the myZyXEL com website Default All other logs generated by the X6004 For example failure to reach a DHCP server System Log Select whether you want to enable logging and the types of logs to record for each source of logs as described in the Log Category field The choices are Disable All Logs Do not log any events Enable Normal Logs Log all events excluding debug events Debug logs are used by service technicians and development engineers Enable All Logs Log all events E mail Server 1 2 Select whether you want to send logs to the e mail address of an administrator you specify in the Log Setting screen Enable Normal Logs Select this to send logs to an administrator at the time interval you specify in the Log Setting screen Enable Alert Log Select this to send e mail alerts to an administrator when emergency alert or critical level logs are created on the X6004 Remote Server 1 Select whether you want to send logs to the syslog servers you configure in the 4 Log Setting screen For each syslog server choose one of the following options Disable All Logs Do not send any log events Enable Normal Logs Send all logs excluding debug events Debug logs are used by service technicians and development engineers Enable All Logs Send all logs X6004 User s Guide 233 Ch
29. 14 1 1 Voice Codecs A codec coder decoder codes analog voice signals into digital signals and decodes the digital signals back into voice signals The following table describes the codecs supported on the X6004 Table 34 Voice Codecs Supported CODEC DESCRIPTION G 711 This is a Pulse Code Modulation PCM waveform codec PCM measures analog signal amplitudes at regular time intervals sampling and converts them into digital bits quantization Quantization reads the analog signal and then writes it to the nearest digital value For this reason a digital sample is usually slightly different from its analog original this difference is known as quantization noise G 711 provides excellent sound quality but requires 64kbps of bandwidth There are two main algorithms defined in the G 711 standard the p law algorithm used in North America amp Japan and a law algorithm used in Europe and the rest of the world G 722 G 722 is an ADPCM codec see G 723 working at 48 64 Kbps with an audio sample rate of 16 KHz G 722 provides excellent sound quality Note The X6004 supports G 722 pass through meaning that devices communicating via the X6004 must support this codec G 722 AMR WB also referred to G 722 2 G 722 2 is similar to G 722 but with a lower compression rate that can vary according to the amount of available bandwidth When there is plenty of bandwidth the compression ratio decreases
30. 5 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type https and the IP address of the X6004 for example the default LAN IP address 1s 192 168 1 12 and the default WAN IP address is 172 16 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 Enter your login credentials and click Login BES The upper part of the login screen is for logins into the web phone feature See Chapter 32 on page 265 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator Figure 69 Web Configurator Login IPPBX X6004 Language Engish 7 Enter Extension number and PIN Code then click Login Extension PIN Code inistrator Username and Password then click Login Username Password 0 alphanumeric printable characters and no spaces max a Note Please turn on the Javascript and ActiveX control setting on Internet Explorer and trun off the block popup window application Login Reset 4 A screen opens up prompting you to change the default user name and password Change the default password note it down and put it in a safe place Click Apply to go to the status screen of the web configurator R Username Password Setup As a security precaution it is highly recommended that you change the admin username amp password Old Password f 3 Username 4 Pa
31. BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE BES This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com BES This Product includes SSLeay 0 8 0 software under the SSLeay License SSLeay licence Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms ex
32. Call Block LABEL DESCRIPTION Black list Select Disable to turn call blocking off on the X6004 Select Enable to turn on call blocking on the X6004 Click Black list to configure the phone numbers you want to block from calling into the X6004 See Section 7 4 1 on page 99 Block the calls Select Disable to allow incoming calls without caller ID to be routed by the X6004 without Caller ID Select Enable to block calls without caller ID from being routed by the X6004 Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 7 4 1 Call Blacklist Use this screen to set up a list of phone numbers that are not allowed to call into the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 7 SIP Server You can also use the letters N Z and X to represent numbers you want to block The letter N represents any digit from 0 9 Z any digit from 1 9 and X any digit from 2 9 For example enter 023NNNNNN to block any 9 digit number that starts with 023 from calling the extensions configured on the X6004 Furthermore you can use the period as a wildcard to block any numbers that begin with a pattern of digits you specify For example enter 555 to block any numbers starting with the string 555 from calling the extensions configured on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block AA
33. Configuration 4 view UA eee eme REA 1001 No ar 1002 No g em 1003 No g e 1004 No g ar 1005 No g ar 1006 No g em 1007 No g em 1008 No g em 1009 No g em 1010 No g em 2 Enter the SIP device s MAC address or serial number if it is a ZyXEL softphone This example is for a softphone with a serial number of 1234567890 Click Set Profile X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 21 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit Auto Provision Setting Provisioning Setting MAC Address rael Serial No 2345678900 Auto Provision Active On ee Rrovision interval xg seconds lt 1 26000000 gt Auto Provision Delay Time Random gt seconds ATA device Ci Port No fa SetProfile SetProfile Cancel 3 The serial number of the softphone that is to use the SIP extension displays in the summary screen Figure 22 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision Configuration B Edit SP Advanced 1001 123456789 No g ar 1002 No g ar 1003 No g de 1004 No g ar 1005 No g ar 1006 No g ar 1007 No g ar 1008 No g d 1009 No g ar 1010 No g ar 4 Repeat these steps to map each SIP extension to a SIP device s MAC address or serial number 3 1 4 1 Configuring the IP Phones for Auto Provisioning Configure the ZyXEL IP phones to receive configuration information from the X6004 T
34. Extension Number 5000 Interface Slot Slot amp Part Port 1 x Web IVR VM PIN Code p Department First Name Last Name Description 5000 Apply Back to Peer List Each field is described in the following table Table 50 FXS Extension Basic LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Setting Group Select the authority group you want this extension to belong to Extension Type the extension number for this analog phone extension Number Interface Specify the location on the FXS interface card that the analog phone with this extension is connected to Web IVR VM PIN Type the PIN code that this allows the person with this extension to access the Code web portal Interactive Voice Response system or Voice Mail This value can be up to eight alphanumeric characters and spaces are not allowed Department Type the department for this SIP extension This field can be left blank First Name Type the first name of the person this FXS extension is assigned to This field can be left blank Last Name Type the last name of the person this FXS extension is assigned to This field can be left blank Description Type a brief description for this SIP extension This field can be left blank X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Table 50 FXS Extension Basic LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back to Peer List Click Back to Peer List to
35. FXOi Outgoing Group for FXOL Pe wt SIP1 Outgoing Group for SIP1 iB S Groupi Groupi Peers Each field is described in the following table Table 62 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Group LABEL DESCRIPTION FXO Trunk SIP These headings divide the screen into sections based on the type of outside line Trunk Trusted you have configured Peer FXO Trunk refers to a connection from the X6004 to the PSTN your local telephone company via the FXO port on the X6004 SIP Trunk refers to a connection from the X6004 to a SIP server at your VoIP service provider Trusted Peer refers to a connection to another SIP server for example another X6004 that has configured your X6004 as a trusted peer Machine ID This field displays the ID of the X6004 on which an outside line is configured Group Name This field displays the name of an outside line Description This field displays the description for an outside line Add Advanced Select from one of the following choices Edit Delete Auto Add to create a new outbound line group Attendant Advanced to configure the settings of an outbound line group Edit to change the name or description of an outbound line group Delete to remove an existing outbound line group Auto Attendant to assign an auto attendant to an outbound line group 18 3 FXO Trunk Configuration FXO trunks allow you to connect to the PST
36. LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 141 Subnet 2 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 142 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 143 Subnet 4 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192
37. Network Setup 73 Chapter 5 The Web Configurator AY A UO A OO 75 cmo me 75 Dan o BB LOGIN aan eee eis 75 SEENL RCcuUESC a n fT L1 The Navgaton Panal Nr ence 78 545 Dashboard System Niomalon auipseusxe eben iinn ASRS N 79 Toon Your O O T a abd nb m nn dU cta n ene 82 5 6 icons in the Web Configurator 1 59 rbi dn Hebnda deu tapas paa ida aaea Pepn uada Papa dede used Lead 82 O7 RESCUING ihe ig e 83 TO RDO MO 050 c A 83 5 9 Logging OUt of Wie Web Coniiguralor 35ssstenitostchebei ola beUo REIN SEP a PER bot N IUS q bp dua 83 nil ee S T A E E N E I T iui E 84 Chapter 6 Nerwark DEDIOYMO Mencii nos 85 12 X6004 User s Guide Table of Contents 6 1 Nebwork Deployment Cue Viu 2 roti tap Fe r1 Fx SR E SR PH 3 Rd 4 Sada d dS Rd 85 DALAN COM U Tc PN 86 pcne Mee M 86 6 3 1 DNS Server Address AesIgrumibUlt uiuere eer iR uu Eta d gt eda pe etd nh ned 86 SR Mae Eric e 86 GA DDNS Dynamit DNS T adoni ii eai aaie aei asee haa 87 GM T DYNDNS Ipso oc RT NINE RR NR Ee 88 ALDONOS COMET UI TOT E m T 88 6 5 NTP Network Time Protocol Configuration 1r or re hore Mere Ere x a M a opea xi RR rada 89 6 6 Statie ROUS VII iistetuniistecmun obe erna aN EEKE RU BRE DeNA RE CR NDA Bebe e be ERU IN nies 90 6 6 1 COnngur
38. Ring Tone mH mH mH Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Distinctive Ring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate the distinctive ring feature Ring Tone Select a ring tone and press Playback to listen to the ring tone on the computer that you are configuring the X6004 Internal Call Select the ring tone for internal calls calls from one extension to another extension on the X6004 SIP Trunk Select the ring tone for calls coming in from the SIP trunk for example your connection to the ITSP FXO Select the ring tone for calls coming in from the FXO trunk for example your connection to the PSTN Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 22 6 Auto Callback Overview The auto callback feature is used when a caller encounters a busy signal when dialing one of the extensions The caller can then request the X6004 to automatically call both parties when both of the extensions are free Click Configuration gt PBX gt Call Settings gt Auto Callback to configure the auto callback feature Figure 184 Auto Callback Auto Callback Auto Callback active Queue Size Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Auto Callback LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate the auto callba
39. Table 40 Add Multiple SIP Extensions LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to go back to Authority Group configuration page without saving your changes 14 3 2 Add a SIP Extension Use this screen to add a SIP extension to an authority group on the X6004 To access this screen click the Add icon in the Authority Group configuration screen Figure 108 Add a SIP Extension Authority Group Basic Setting Group detaut x Extension Number Web IVR VM PIN Code SIP Auth User Name SIP Auth Password rkuvtoriasion C Random HN Description Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 41 Add a SIP Extension LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Setting Group Select the authority group you want this extension to belong to Extension Type the extension number for this IP phone extension The extension number Number can be from 1 to 20 digits in length Web IVR VM PIN Type the PIN code that this allows the person with this extension to access the Code web portal Interactive Voice Response system or Voice Mail This value can be up to eight alphanumeric characters and spaces are not allowed SIP Auth User Type the SIP user name associated with this extension The IP phone registering Name with the X6004 must provide this for authentication The user name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are n
40. The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 ZyStack Add LABEL DESCRIPTION ZyStack Add Use this section to add an additional member to your ZyStack Serial Type the serial number of the X6004 you want to add to the ZyStack You can get the serial number by clicking on the edit icon in the Configuration gt ZyStack gt Setting screen of an X6004 that is not part of a ZyStack Description Type a description for this ZyStack member WAN IP Type the WAN IP address of the X6004 you want to add to the ZyStack LAN IP Type the LAN IP address of the X6004 you want to add to the ZyStack Z Interface This field is only configurable for the ZyStack master It displays whether the interface on the master X6004 is LAN or WAN for the ZyStack Failsafe Select the failsafe mode for this ZyStack Select Active if you want all the X6004 to be in operational mode in the ZyStack or Select Standby if you want the X6004 to act as a back up in case of a failure of a ZyStack member See Section 23 1 on page 207 for more information Add Click Add to save your changes to the X6004 Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 23 2 2 ZyStack Edit Screen Use this screen to edit the serial number or description of an existing ZyStack member Click the Edit icon in the Configuration gt ZyStack gt Setting screen to view the s
41. Use the drop down listbox to choose Totally Match if you want to display only call records that exactly match the criteria you type in or select Partially Match if you want to enter only a part of the telephone number to search for X6004 User s Guide 243 Chapter 27 Call Detail Record CDR Table 112 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt CDR Query continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Show Use this section to specify which details you want to display in the CDR report for Items each telephone call record displayed You can choose to display the following details Call Date The date and time the call took place start time Called Number The telephone number of a callee Dst Channel The type of outbound line group if the callee is outside your organization or the extension type SIP or FXS if the callee is within your organization Call Result Answered if the call was completed successfully Not Answered if the call was not answered Caller ID The username associated with the extension that partook in the call Caller Group The authority group of the extension that partook in the call or the outbound line group used to make the call Call Time The total duration of the call from the time the ringing started until one of the parties hung up Caller Number The telephone number fro which the call originated from Src Channel the interface type FXS FXO or SIP
42. Use this screen to configure settings for the analog phones connected to the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXS Figure 85 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXS FXS Configuration FXS Configuration Speaking Volume Listening Volume Dial Interval Country Code Machine 1p IPPBX_001 Slot Slot amp z Port Port 1 Level Bl gt Level 2 _ Sec s x Code USA Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 20 Configuration PBX Server Configuration SIP Server FXS LABEL DESCRIPTION FXS Use these fields to specify the FXS interface which you want to configure Configuration Machine ID Specify the X6004 for which you want to configure FXS settings This field is only configurable if you have more than one X6004 working in a ZyStack Slot Specify which FXS interface card you want to configure The cards are identified by the extension card slot they are installed in Select one of the slots or select All to make the settings the same for all FXS interface cards Port Specify the FXS port on the FXS interface card you want to configure X6004 User s Guide Chapter 7 SIP Server Table 20 Configuration PBX Server Configuration SIP Server FXS LABEL DESCRIPTION Speaking Volume Select the volume level transmit
43. and when there is network congestion the compression ratio increases This is also known as Adaptive Multi Rate WideBand AMR WB Note The X6004 supports G 722 2 pass through meaning that devices communicating via the X6004 must support this codec G 723 1 This is an ITU International Telecommunication Union standard for voice coding The G 723 1 compresses voice audio in 30 ms frames The G 723 1 operates at two bitrates 6 3 kbps when sampling at 24 bytes or 5 3 kbps when sampling at 20 bytes per 30 ms frame G 726 This is an Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM waveform codec that uses a lower bitrate than standard PCM conversion G 726 operates at 16 24 32 or 40 kbps Differential or Delta PCM is similar to PCM but encodes the audio signal based on the difference between one sample and a prediction based on previous samples rather than encoding the sample s actual quantized value Many thousands of samples are taken each second and the differences between consecutive samples are usually quite small so this saves space and reduces the bandwidth necessary G 729 This is an Analysis by Synthesis AbS hybrid waveform codec It uses a filter based on information about how the human vocal tract produces sounds The codec analyzes the incoming voice signal and attempts to synthesize it using its list of voice elements It tests the synthesized signal against the original and if it is acceptable
44. if your organization has one You must have an FXO interface card installed on the X6004 to configure these connections SIP Trunk B shows the X6004 connected to a SIP server at your VoIP service provider You can use the SIP trunk to connect to a SIP server on which you have an existing SIP account Trusted Peer C shows the X6004 connected to another X6004 for example at your branch office You can establish a trusted peer connection with another SIP server that lists your X6004 as a trusted peer e Figure 141 Outbound Line Overview The outbound lines define a connection between the X6004 and PSTN ITSP or your trusted peer To make calls from extensions on your network you still have to define LCRs which are outbound dialing rules See Chapter 20 on page 185 You also have to configure an auto attendant to handle the forwarding of incoming calls See Chapter 19 on page 175 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group 18 2 Outbound Line Group Screen Use this screen to manage the outside lines on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group Figure 142 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Group Outbound Line Group FXO Trunk IPPBX 001 SIP Trunk IPPBX 001 Trusted Peer IPPBX 001 ee Group Name ENT NN UU a NENNT T NNNM T T Giadd dW advanced B Edit Delete auto attendant
45. 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 146 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask Ifthe ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Ne
46. 247 edit 248 rank 247 administrator list 246 aggregating multiple X6004 207 alternative subnet mask notation 289 analog phones status 224 Analog Telephone Adapter ATA 34 analog telephones 37 Apache License 307 associating groups 196 ATA Analog Telephone Adapter 34 audio files for auto attendant 177 recording 177 audio files format 177 audio on hold 202 authority group 191 and LCR 54 61 management 191 authority groups 37 and call access code 159 and call routing 39 and extensions 37 and LCRs 192 and ring groups 192 auto callback 203 auto configuration 46 auto provisioning 46 and MAC address 47 and serial number 47 client configuration 48 auto attendant 38 51 58 175 adding deleting 180 advanced example 176 and FAX 175 and fax machine 38 and FXO trunk 166 and night service 183 and SIP trunks 170 Index audio files 177 call routing 175 diagram 175 management 179 menus 176 180 recording instructions 177 structure 175 automatic switchboard operator 175 B backup configuration 253 basic setup tutorial 41 blacklist 267 271 blocking 267 C call access code 159 adding and editing 160 configuration 160 Call Detail Record see CDR 239 call features 62 197 call forward 267 call parking 204 configuration 205 overview 204 call record 242 call routing terms 37 call services 197 auto callback 203 call parking 204 conference call 199 distinctive ring 202 emergency call 198 music on hold 2
47. 27 2337 22 5060 f 27 2337 22 info on Extension Number ss 122 Ak CODEC List 5 The Outbound Line Group screen displays again Click the Auto Attendant icon in the SIP Trunk section of the screen Figure 44 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group FXO Trunk IPPBX 001 SIP Trunk IPPBX 001 Trusted Peer a S NENNEN i Si EACUS ea Ie Badd AP Advanced BP Edit fil Delete A Auto Attendant PSTN1 PF S ITSP1 a KI 6 Make sure the Default AA option is selected FAX is used to forward calls to a single extension such as your FAX machine s extension and click Apply X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 45 Confirm AA Setting Auto Attendant Setting Auto Attendant DID C Enable _ DID Mapping Disable Apply 44 Default AA v Apply Cancel 7 People from the outside world can now call the X6004 using the numbers provided by your ITSP The Default AA prompts the callers to dial the extension they would like to reach See Section 3 3 2 on page 59 for information on how to set up a dialing rule so that the extensions on your network can make calls via your ITSP 3 3 2 Dialing Rule for ITSP In our example we want to use the ITSP1 outbound line group to complete long distance calls This is done by configuring the long distance call LCR This figure also shows the local call LCR we created in Section
48. 3 2 2 on page 52 Figure 46 Outbound Calls via ITSP local call long distance call Procedure 1 Inthe web configurator click Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR to open the following screen Figure 47 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR LCR List Delete Q add amp Edit f Delete Cin E ezout easy to call out B it E local_call local call LCR EP dur Ei long distance call long distance call LCR Cg E international call international call LCR B dl Delete X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Click the Edit icon in the long distance call section to open the following screen Select the outbound line group from the pool column that you want to add to this LCR in our example this is IPPBX 001 ITSP1 as configured in Section 3 3 1 on page 55 then click the Right icon to move it to the Selected column Click Apply to save the outbound line group in the LCR and then click the Add icon to configure a dial condition Figure 48 long distance call LCR LCR List LCR Item LCR Data LCR Name long distance call Description fong distance call LCR Max Call Time sec a x Outbound line group o ep Dial Condition List Delete Gi Add amp Edit fi Delete Dial Condition Delete Kea 3 The Dial Condition screen appears as shown Type 1XXXXX followed by a period in the Dial Condition fiel
49. 3 Service Use the Service screen to register and enter your license key information provided in the box with your X6004 You can also view the services to which you currently subscribe Click Maintenance gt License Control gt Service to open the screen as shown next BS If you restore the X6004 to the default configuration file or upload a different configuration file after you register click the Service License Refresh button to update license information Figure 221 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service Service Management Extension Node Number 16 Soft Phone Node Number 0 License Upgrade License Key Update Service License Refresh Sync with myZyXEL com to download license Info Each field is described in the following table Table 124 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Use this section to view details about the services you are subscribing to Management Service This field displays the name of the service available on the X6004 Quantity This field displays the number of licenses you have registered for a each service License Upgrade Use this section to update your license information X6004 User s Guide Chapter 31 myZyXEL com Table 124 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service LABEL DESCRIPTION License Key Enter your license key provided in the box with your X6004 and click Update to activate or e
50. 4 Part 10 H 264 can provide excellent video quality at bandwidth from 40 Kbps upwards 14 2 Authority Group Use this screen to set up authority groups on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group Figure 103 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group Authority Group Authority Group Extension Number Query Gh add diAdvanced Bf edit fil Delete motores 2 NL She al bret Most dab E IPPBX 001 default default extension group IPPBX 001 test test description IPPBX 001 PM PM2 Each field is described in the following table Table 36 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Authority Group This screen allows you to see which authority groups are configured on the X6004 and it allows you to search extensions configured on the X6004 Extension Type an extension number and click Query to see if an extension number is Number already configured on the X6004 and to view its details See Section 14 2 1 on page 128 for details Machine ID This field indicates the Machine ID of the X6004 on which this authority group was created Group Name This is the name of the authority group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Table 36 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group
51. 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support g zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary X6004 User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support India Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL M
52. 980198014 SIP 98 Phone Number 1111 980198044 SIP 98 2nd Backup Avtive lt O No 1 Yes gt 1 980198045 SIP 98 2nd Backup Server Address 172 23 37 201 980198046 SIP 98 2nd Backup Server Port lt 1024 65535 gt 5060 980198047 SIP 98 2nd Backup Registartion Server IP 172 23 37 201 980198048 SIP 98 2nd Backup Registartion Server Port lt 1024 65535 gt 5060 980600001 Auto Provision Avtive lt O No 1 Yes gt 1 980600003 Auto Provision Expire Time Second lt 1 26000000 gt 43200 980600005 Auto Provision Protocaol lt O TFTP 1 HTTP 2 HTTPS gt 1 980600007 Auto Provision Delay Time Second 30 SPTGEN Fi gt 1 Cancel The SPTGEN file displays the configuration settings sent from the X6004 to a ZyXEL device configured for auto provisioning Click Return to go back to the Auto Provision screen X6004 User s Guide QoS This chapter shows you how to configure Quality of Service QoS settings on the X6004 9 1 QoS Overview Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical applications such as VoIP The following problems can occur on a congested network with poor QoS set
53. Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt DSP Management sees 121 Table 33 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Office Hour sse 123 TAD 34 WORE Codecs Supported e oak espe cd X UT 126 Table 35 Voice Codecs SUBPOME t 127 Table 36 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group sseee 127 Table o7 Extension Query ROSU cacccicstesconiaaistnetsnigcpennbeiehenience mh DOR piu Pda bo I p PELA D RO aeeeemaaeee 128 Table 38 Add Edit Authorily Group e 129 X6004 User s Guide List of Tables Table 39 Authority Group Configuratio aiismecskouissec bless resta dat ios ME sesion gv vaa dark d su saa add 130 Table D Add Maltiple SIP Extension uxsudiset iki xS pA XtHEEREM AS ERIE Ic O CREER bqa ard EFE EN EXE ERREUR ad Ea pet 131 Table 4 Add a SIP Extension 2 5 ccudaieseu erii ettet tdt to ud dde tt dr rte b Idee c edd dk tbv edd Eod dvi 133 jr ez oll EOE ON seca psa ET 134 Table 43 SIP Extension Cal Fawad prisan nN an ieee 136 Wate 44 DND Whith LIST e nai aaeeeiai a a iiA 137 TAME SES FOO ME ST Tn 138 E mod c 45 Rer c c E 138 Table SIF extensions Voice Bell 1 5 yd co p di dr p d dla adl d vr di do dac de ia 139 Table 48 SIP Extension Advanced Screen 1 eei iiess seas nan nih adn RH ARRA HA ARR RE edd 140 Table 49 Add an FXS EXIODSIOD 2uiiencecesiesectuo bt equscke etd euctebid I rE qur
54. Dial Number Viewer IPPBX O001 ITSP1 Emm Apply Cancel cs You are done configuring the LCR However before it can be used by any of the phones connected to the X6004 the LCR needs to be assigned to an appropriate authority group 3 3 3 LCR to Authority Group Assignment The Group Management screen allows you to give an authority group and the extensions in that group the right to use an LCR outbound dial condition In our example we give the authority group Basic the right to call out using the LCR long distance call Procedure 1 Click Configuration gt PBX gt Group Manageme Figure 50 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management nt to view the following screen Group Management Authority Group IPPBX 001 Basic FXO Trunk IPPBX 0Di PSTN1 SIP Trunk IPPBX 001 ITSP1 Trusted Peer ar ar 2 Click the Advanced icon in the Authority Group section in this example there is only one authority group Basic of the screen to view the screen as shown Select the checkbox in the Advanced column of the long distance call LCR as shown below Click Apply X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 51 LCR to Authority Group Assignment Accessible Group List Group Name Basic ezout easy to call out LCR O local call local call LCR LCR Vv long_distance_call long distance call LCR LCR international_call international call LCR LCR Apply Can
55. FAO Menace eec Hem 165 Table o4 Configure an FXO ternate vaisescdnissede tie spear doe eet naa i aati ionik ELN 166 Table 65 AA for Incoming Calle 2isenazieedded topi edd epa edebat risale eee ob ad E aliia 166 EE Cis Poolksspiel M Wem T 167 Table G7 Conioure a SIP TONK M T 168 eena e Ao a UR 170 Table 69 DID Mapping Seting sorridia E EE RA 171 Tabie 70 Adde dI Trusted FOOT anoano aA A ica d eid 172 Table 71 Trusied Poer CORITOOUEADOE saaccinresaaaiteniunaaterniosuasidepantdnaei ANANA 172 Table 72 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant ssssse 179 LiscXser coser ia reor MET 180 Table 74 Auto Attendant Menu EUROS icon reri e ERO T E p Hn Sepe FEED d AR EEHS an FEE FR eger RERO eeH ERO Aq E RUN 181 Table 75 Add Edit AutesAttendant ODIO ir t eter rto abad aee dada o sane a aeta Fo XE Ya d ga 182 Table 76 Auto Attendant Menu Settings Night Service ssesssse eem 184 Table 77 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LOR sss 186 Tape TO LOR CONIU ui P 188 Tabs P9 LER DIIS GEO dan N 189 Table 80 Configuration PBX gt Group Management Liuius enses peintre rei red art rh sua k dada datu ad net neina 195 X6004 User s Guide List of Tables Table 81 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management gt Advanced sese 196 Table 32 Call Services D
56. Figure 20 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision eeeeeene 47 Figure 21 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit sssssss 48 Figure 22 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision seeeeeeneee 48 Fig re Ty a PSTN Call eT 49 Figure 24 FXO Interface Card Commelin isicaacesnieicmdosisiamaseisscniarebwiame EIE bu EH lx DEM Bo bN OU SEERPEEK UMEN DUI GE 49 Figure 25 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group 50 qu SR D UENIT Mee 50 Figure 27 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group 50 Figure Ze FXO Connection C OBTIGHESIIGHE 25225 Lit tari e OG Rez a o Roc Pep Reda ec ER 51 Figure 29 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group 51 Figure 30 Conirm AA Seting e 51 Figure 31 Outbound Calls via PSTN susincssseccwirsesaitevunicsostecnds nni e nr sha EC CR EEA NNN REY Ee Ibid EESE E ERRE EE 52 Figure 32 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR see 52 Foure Aoa e DES ZA EE 53 Figure 34 Dial Condition for local Gall LCR iio rentur ker nde pk aea Lua aid iba dd eA e La ER 53 Figure 35 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management uiae ec re ertet ert tees eee ertt rs t
57. Global Set ss 96 Table 19 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXO sem 97 Table 20 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXS sss 98 Table 21 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block nesses 99 Table 22 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block gt Black List 100 Table 23 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Feature Code 191 Table 24 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision ssseeeeese 105 Table 25 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit eseese 105 Table 26 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt QoS sssssssseeeee e 109 Table 27 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Voice Mail ee 112 Table 28 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook sse 114 Table 29 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt LDAP Phonebook 116 Table 30 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt Local Phonebook 117 Table 31 Local Phonebook Add Edit SGre unuiaeecsesese na era bak euu bara desi k tok aeta Eta d ded in pha rd d Din EE Pd eda ER ade 118 Table 32
58. Group Management 191 Call Services 197 ZyStack 207 SIP Server This chapter shows you how to set up your SIP server settings on the X6004 It also covers parameters for FXO FXS channels call blocking settings and feature codes T 1 SIP Server Overview The following diagram shows SIP devices communicating with the X6004 In SIP some devices act as clients and others as servers For example in the figure below devices A D act as clients and must register with the X6004 before they are able to make calls via the X6004 The X6004 also is a client in relation to the SIP server located at the ITSP F The X6004 must register with the ITSP SIP server before calls can be routed to telephones outside its network Finally two SIP servers can act as peers as shown with another X6004 E in the figure below In this case both X6004s must register with each other before they can forward each other s calls Figure 82 SIP Devices and the X6004 7 1 1 RTP When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real Time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer See RFC 1889 for details on RTP X6004 User s Guide Chapter 7 SIP Server 7 2 SIP Server Global Settings Use this screen to set up the SIP server settings on the X6004 SIP clients such as the IP phones on your network must enter this information when registering with the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuratio
59. IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE BS This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation For more information on the Apache Software Foundation please see lt http www apache org gt X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements BS Portions of this software are based upon public domain software originally written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois Urbana Champaign BS This Product includes php software under the PHP License The PHP License version 3 0 Copyright c 1999 2006 The PHP Group All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification is permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name PHP must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact group php net 4 Products derived from this software may not be called PH
60. ITE CIL E I IDOL IP TAA 249 NEC CUIe2EC 7 ere 249 29 11 ese COONEY m 249 29 1 2 Packer Capture SCEE uouiseuen ip pr Leipz ed e pe Ua aaa aa li CE REPRE Lex vea dd ga 250 Chapter 30 System File rtis dG 253 30 7 Configuration File Maintenant lt caccccasoceacccasianinaciaduessiniaaswesutedydiesnonecdunceoniaisiueieccaaturrtouks 253 20 1 1 Backups Restore Sa oio pente c b RR Ron EE a BR ka Rev Extra d 253 30 2 Fiimware Upgrade Scrl Uc 255 280 3 FTP Command EINE n 256 3003 1 FISH LOM CNOONS incisis tH POM EE aaia EA AE AAN Eaa AEE 256 30 3 2 GUl based FTP CIBDUS iioii re trc nn ANEN 257 Chapter 31 SISAL COM m rea ieaS ei caste EAEKO AREAK KAE SATE K AESi 259 X6004 User s Guide Table of Contents 212v XE L com OVEN Lassocasttvercassiedeondu addi ond apr Li RH Gas Ld dad dl a Sf 259 31 1 1 Subscription Services Available on the X6004 sssssssssssssseseees 259 Olid RESTANO T M 260 SHE US aem cS 261 21 9 License SAUS ulcsd tetestuivcnbbnd nen EM E qM IT EPUM TNI EAM RRAE II 262 Part V Web Portal and IVR oreco 263 Chapter 32 bibant M 265 22 1 Web Portal OUOISIQMW oiseau orsa a MEE santa docs ERAT EX tvenicacts S AL eo EM FRAG NDA ADD ERI I aM koni 265 Qc Vb Portal BOO ensis dieta RAS n bd ume a d e bod cc EO LE D a ee 265 Dx leen qnkci ini o er eee ea aa 266 22 4 Call Forw
61. IV Call Date M Called Number Dst Channel Call Result To er A Po b 7 L Sun Mon The Wed Tue Fri Sat extension extension 7 extension outbound a oss ES 7 3 A outbound extension outbound outbound 11 x S ps v te ve __ __ recone si sg iat genase D feos Totally Match v E Totally Match Tete Match Caller ID IV Caller Number I Caller Group src Channel Call Time IV Talk Time Report Each field is described in the following table Table 112 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt CDR Query LABEL DESCRIPTION Query Condition Use this section to specify your query details Start Time Specify the time period for your query Choose a specific time period from the drop down list box or fill in the From and To fields with the time range you want to search the call detail record You can use the pop up calendar to fill in the date fields for the To and From fields by clicking the ES buttons and selecting the date X6004 User s Guide Chapter 27 Call Detail Record CDR Table 112 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt CDR Query continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Direction Specify the types of calls you want to view based on the source and destination of the calls You can choose one or more of the available source destination combinations extension extension to view internal calls those made from one extension to another extension on the X6004
62. LCR LCR List LCR Item Dial Condition Dial Condition LCR Name local_call Dial Condition fo Oo Number Pattern Test 05555555 o Dial Number Viewer LE MEME IPPBX_001 PSTN1 fs Eel 4 You are done configuring the LCR However before it can be used by any of the phones connected to the X6004 the LCR needs to be assigned to an appropriate authority group X6004 User s Guide 53 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 2 3 LCR to Authority Group Assignment The Group Management screen allows you to give an authority group and the extensions in that group the right to use an LCR outbound dial condition In our example we give the authority group Basic the right to call out using the LCR local call Procedure 1 Click Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management to view the following screen Figure 35 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management Group Management Authority Group IPPBX 001 FXO Trunk IPPBX 001 SIP Trunk IPPBX 001 Trusted Peer Basic a PSTN1 SS ee ee ar ITSP1 gees Setting 2 Click the Advanced icon in the Authority Group section in this example there is only one authority group Basic of the screen to view the screen as shown Select the checkbox in the Advanced column ofthe local call LCR as shown below Click Apply Figure 36 LCR to Authority Group Assignment Group Management Accessible Group List Group Name
63. List On 67 Black List Off a5 Block no ID On pH o Block no ID Off fe Call Forward On p Call Forward Off Fm Call Forward IVR Z Call Forward Busy On fo Call Forward Busy Off 91 Call Forward Busy IVR 92 Call Forward No Answer On 82 Call Forward No Answer Off 83 Call Forward No Answer IVR 84 Call Transfer a6 Direct Pickup s DND On Fe DND Off fr DND IVR fa Follow Me On 22 Follow Me Off 23 Group Pickup 94 Personal IVR F Voice Mail F Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Configuration PBX Server Configuration SIP Server Feature Code LABEL DESCRIPTION Feature code setting The codes you enter are dialed by individuals to manage the features listed below for their extension Black List On Enter the code used to enable call blocking for numbers on the personal blacklist of an extension Black List Off Enter the code used to disable call blocking for numbers on the personal blacklist of an extension Block no ID On Enter the code used to enable call blocking for calls without a caller ID Block no ID Off Enter the code used to disable call blocking for calls without a caller ID Call Forward On Enter the code used to enable call forwarding Call Forward Off Enter the code used to disable call forwarding Call Forward Enter the code used to edit call forwarding settings IVR Call Forward En
64. Note It may take several minutes to perform the data collection Do not try to browse to other screens while the capture is in progress Filename This field displays the name of the cap file which holds the packet capture data The file naming convention is X6004 YYYYMMDD cap where YYYY is the year MM is the month and DD is the day of the month on which the capture took place Last Modified This field displays the date and time when the information was collected from the X6004 Size This field displays the size of the file Download Click Download to save the file to your computer X6004 User s Guide System File Maintenance This chapter shows you how to upload new firmware and manage the configuration file on the X6004 30 1 Configuration File Maintenance BS The X6004 allows you to save a configuration file to your local computer You should create a backup file of your configuration when you have configured all your settings and the X6004 is functioning properly Restore the configuration if you are experiencing problems with the X6004 The information related to administrator accounts on the X6004 is not saved when you create a backup configuration file When you restore a configuration file on the X6004 you do not change the currently configured administrator accounts on the X6004 You must restart the X6004 after you restore a configuration file for the restored settings to be ap
65. REOR nnt ee ptc itt ela tt S bd 139 Figure 115 SIP Extensi n Advanced Sereen uis ir cen tina a ii ca a ie ta ERR RA a E CIR E HR E vanes 140 Figure 116 Add an FAS EXIOnSiON e M 141 Figue TT FAS EXON OI Basle 1iusscnnd ied o na Adi atdd asi ag tcc pd bad Le dt LR pene 142 Figure TIS FXS Extension Cal Forward dddcentencetn End IEEE a bete vn o ERDu vaR ai EUR Ix asc pep v PL Epp vp bUldd 143 Figure 119 FAS Extension Volo Mall 22 to tret peor ta o peor tuu go er toan peo re I I E Eee Zuma epe pL dp as e epa zx pp DOE 144 Figure 120 FXS Extension Advanced Screen 1s eism krank RR RE ERR nnkan nekanan ERR IRR IRA ERR ERR 144 Figure 121 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group see 145 Figure 122 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Add ssss 146 Figure 123 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Edit sssssse 147 Figure 124 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Advanced 147 X6004 User s Guide 23 List of Figures Figure T25 Add Edit Page UU ecc aa cbe GR RCbc SS ada qo o a tac adt n E tg ad at 148 Figure 120 Add Edit Hunt Group c T 149 Figure 127 Paging Group Example scccdeisesecasecvssncadivienecasivvenccacdevestercadervasnaadiveseweeduvuaccadevivenadevevasie 151 Figure 128 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension M
66. Ring Group for Marketing IPPBX_001 Marketing Badd dPiadvanced B edit Delete i oe Paging section 4 The configuration screen for the Marketing ring group opens up Click Add in the a ff ul X6004 User s Guide K 1 Inthe web configurator click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Chapter 15 Ring Group Figure 131 Ring Group for Marketing Paging Delete Badd Bf Edit f Delete SS SSS SS Demum Delete Hunt Delete Giadd B Edit f Delete SES SS SS Delete cones 5 The Page screen opens up Type 888 in the Entry Number field 444 in the Pincode field and 300 in the Max Paging Time field this last entry keeps the paging time to a maximum of five minutes Next highlight the extensions you want to belong to the Marketing page group one at a time and use the Right icon to move them to the Selected Member column Click Apply when you are done Figure 132 Ring Group for Marketing Page Entry educ Pincode 0 9 Max Paging m 10 3600 sec Time Description Selected Member Extensions EIE 6 You are done configuring the Marketing page group You still have to assign rights to It so that members of the Basic authority group can use this feature Click Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management and click the Advanced icon next to the Basic authority group as shown next 152 X6004 User s Guide Cha
67. Syslog The X6004 can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog server IVR Interactive Voice Response system allows users to edit some of their personal unique to their extension settings via their handsets For example users can change their voicemail and forwarding settings using IVR Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP tool to put it on the X6004 Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Make a copy of the X6004 s configuration and put it back on the X6004 Restoration later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the X6004 Table 135 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 791 IP RFC 793 TCP RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1889 RTP RFC 1890 RTCP RFC 2131 RFC 2132 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP RFC 2136 DDNS RFC 2327 Session Description Protocol SDP RFC 2833 DTMF RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3261 SIP RFC 3842 Message Waiting Indicator X6004 User s Guide Chapter 34 Product Specifications Table 135 Standards Supported continued
68. Type Password and retype the new password for this extension This is the password you will need to enter when registering a SIP phone with the X6004 This field is not available for FXS extensions on the X6004 Web IVR VM PIN Use these fields to change the PIN Personal Identification Number you need to Code enter when accessing the web portal Interactive Voice Response system or Voice Mail Type and retype the new PIN Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Reset Click this to begin configuring the fields again 32 4 Call Forwarding and Blocking Use this screen to set up call forwarding and call blocking rules for your extension To access this screen click Forward Block in the web portal X6004 User s Guide 267 Chapter 32 Web Portal Figure 226 Forward Block ZyXEL Call Forward Setting Call Forward Setting Office Hours Office Hours DND Do Not Disturb Blind Forward Busy Forward No Answer Forward After Office Hours Call Blocking Setting Black list Block the calls without Caller ID a N 9 Qv Peer Info Forward Block Voice Mail Web Phone M sun M Mon M Tue M wed IV Thu M rri M sat Time 00 z 00 z 00 00 v Disable C Enable White List p voice Mail Disable Enable Extension Number voice Mail Disable Enable Extension Number voice Mail Disable C Enable Find Me List voice Mai
69. User s Guide Chapter 4 Phone User Tutorial 6 Block Calls Without Caller ID Ensure that Disable is selected 7 Click Apply Your call settings are successfully configured 4 1 5 Setting Up Voicemail Next you can set up your voicemail inbox to automatically send your received messages as audio files to your email inbox It is recommended that you do this so that your voicemail inbox does not fill up 1f it fills up no new messages can be recorded Click the Voice Mail tab at the top of the screen Figure 64 Tutorial Voicemail Tab e Voice Mail The following screen displays Figure 65 Tutorial Setting Up Voicemail Voice Mail Setting Received E mail Address bcd examplecorp com VM attached Voice File VW Delete Voice Message After Mailed Apply Reset The following table shows the example voicemail settings You can also use this table to make a note of the voicemail settings you want to configure if you like Table 6 Tutorial Voicemail Settings EXAMPLE INFORMATION YOUR INFORMATION Received E mail Address user_abcd examplecorp com the address to which you want the voicemail sent Attached Voice File Yes send the audio file to your email account Delete Voice Message After Mailed Yes To configure this screen enter your email address in the Received E mail Address field select Attached Voice File and select Delete Voice Message A
70. X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 238 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 1A F B i P n T I m P P u P i E X Internet I I I A il 1 P 1 I i EXE l a I I 4 192 168 1 0 25 13192 168 1 128 25 Il at a am um um um um um um um D ee oum oum zm zm um A In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 140 Subnet 1
71. ZyStack Intranet Delete Add fil Delete Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 ZyStack Intranet LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select the check boxes of the intranets you want to remove and click the Delete button to remove them No This field displays the index number of an intranet configured for this ZyStack 212 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 23 ZyStack Table 95 ZyStack Intranet continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Intranet This field displays the intranet configured for this ZyStack It is displayed in CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing format The CIDR format is displayed as follows IP address number of matching initial bits in the IP address For example 192 168 1 0 24 indicates the range of IP addresses 192 168 1 0 192 168 1 255 with the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 See Appendix A on page 287 for more information on IP addresses and subnet masks Add Delete Click the Add button to add an intranet for this ZyStack Click the Delete button to remove an existing intranet from this ZyStack 23 4 1 ZyStack Add Intranet Use this screen to add local subnets from which IP phones connect to the X6004s in the ZyStack Adding network subnets helps to increase the efficiency of call routing Click Add in the Configuration gt ZyStack gt Intranet screen to view the following screen Figure 195 ZyStack Add Intranet ZyStack Add In
72. and name from which this call originated Talk Time The total time of the call from the time the callee picked up the call until one of the parties hung up Report Click the Report button to display your query results in a report window Your Internet browser opens up a new window with the query results 27 4 1 CDR Report Screen The CDR Report screen displays the results of the searches you make in the CDR Query screen Specify your search criteria and click the Report button in the CDR Query screen to view the screen as shown next Figure 211 Report LOGS CDR CDR Query Report 1 2007 03 06 17 40 15 1004 1004 1004 h ag default 4 ga 1 gt Lines Page 20 Y Total 1 Caller ID Caller Number Called Number Caller Group Each field is described in the following table Table 113 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt CDR Query gt Report LABEL DESCRIPTION Left Right Use the Left and Right icons to change the page you want to view if the report has more than one page Alternatively use the drop down list box to select the page you want to view Lines Page Specify how many lines you want to display on each page of the report Total This field displays the total pages created by this report Report Output The format of your report depends on the criteria you select in the Report gt LOGS Fields gt CDR gt CDR Query page See Section 27 4 on page 242 for explanation
73. by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence This Product include openldap 2 3 35 software under the OpenLDAP License The Public License Version 2 8 17 August 2003 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation Software with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices t
74. calls by dialing a conference room extension See Section 22 3 on page 199 Music on Hold Upload your choice of audio to play while callers are placed on hold See Section 22 4 on page 202 Distinctive Ring Configure different ring tones for incoming calls This allows you to differentiate where the call is coming from within or outside your organization See Section 22 5 on page 202 Auto Callback Configure the X6004 to automatically call an extension once it frees up ends an existing conversation This eliminates the need for you to keep trying to call a busy extension See Section 22 6 on page 203 Call Parking Configure the X6004 to allow users to put a call on hold at one extension and pick up the call from another extension in your organization See Section 22 7 on page 204 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services 22 2 Emergency Call Overview The X6004 allows you to specify and give higher priority to emergency calls to the outside world You can configure a list of emergency phone numbers for example police or fire department on the X6004 The X6004 recognizes when an emergency number is dialed and tries to send the call to the configured destination number The X6004 tries to use FXO trunks for emergency calls If all the lines on the X6004 are busy the X6004 will free up a line by hanging up an existing FXO conversation and then pass the emergency call to the destination number
75. cause undesired operations X6004 User s Guide 317 Appendix C Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning ESAS ioe SAR alleen Tee EA ete he Ry HIBESERSTSRT ES TEXETETSI T fA E ee KRY ee SH SIR Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your produc
76. created for the IP phones connected to the X6004 and the FXS Peer section shows you the extensions created for the analog phones connected to the X6004 Delete Check the Delete box and click Delete to remove this extension from this authority group User Name This is the username associated with an extension for SIP authentication Type This field displays SIP if this extension is a SIP account or FXS if this extension is associated with an analog phone connected to an FXS port on the X6004 Extension Number This field displays the extension number Description This field displays the description given to this extension Add Edit Delete Click Add to create a new extension on the X6004 Edit to edit an existing extension on the X6004 Delete remove an extension from the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group 14 3 Extension Features You can configure the following features on a per extension basis Call Forwarding set up call forwarding rules for the individual extension based on the following criteria Your extension is busy You turn on DND Do Not Disturb You can set up a list of telephone numbers referred to as the White List that ignore DND Unconditionally forwards all calls to a specific extension or your voice mail There is no answer at your extension This also allows you to set up a Find Me List which is a list of phone
77. criteria consist of the fields you fill in when creating phone book entries In the right text box type in your search criteria Click Search to display any phone book entries that match your query 272 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 32 Web Portal Table 132 Web Phone LABEL DESCRIPTION Call Duration This total time of your conversation is displayed above the input field in the web phone GUI Input Text Type or use your keypad to enter the phone number you want to dial The web phone follows the same dialing rules that you have to follow when you are making calls from any other phone connected to the X6004 Status The status of your phone call is displayed below the text input field The web phone GUI displays the current status of a phone call that is Ringing Talking or Bye It also displays the phone number you dialed from the web phone Phone Keypad You can use your mouse to click on the numbers that make up the telephone number you want to dial Use the Clear icon to delete digits from the screen Use the Dial Pick up icon to dial the number Use the Hang up icon 9 to end a call or to delete a number in the input field Use the Transfer icon gt to forward a call to another extension X6004 User s Guide 273 Chapter 32 Web Portal 274 X6004 User s Guide Interactive Voice Response IVR System This chapter shows yo
78. enable the Do Not Disturb Blind Forward Busy Forward No Answer Forward After Office Hours forward and Blacklist functions You can also specify the telephone extension you want your calls forwarded to or alternatively you can choose to forward calls to your voicemail See Section 14 3 12 on page 143 for more information on call forwarding features and how to configure office hours settings for individual extensions X6004 User s Guide 277 Chapter 33 Interactive Voice Response IVR System Figure 234 IVR Call Forward amp Blacklist Call Forward and Blacklist Voicemail L2 gt Enter Forward Number L2 gt Enter Forward Number Voicemail L2 No Answer Forward Enter Forward Number L2 After Office Hours Enter Forward Number 278 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 33 Interactive Voice Response IVR System 33 6 Personal IVR Voicemail The following figure describes the Voicemail Menu From IVR Main press number 3 on your phone keypad to enter the Voicemail Menu This menu allows you to enable sending your voicemail as an audio file attachment to your email inbox You can also enable erasing your voicemail from the X6004 once it has been forwarded to your email inbox You should enable this option if you do not want to use the built in flash memory on the X6004 to store your voicemail messages
79. following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgments normally appear The names Apache and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their name without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING
80. gets involved in case of a break down on one of the X6004s When a member of the ZyStack breaks down the X6004 that was on the sideline is ready to take the place of the downed X6004 In this failsafe mode all of the X6004s have the same copy of the configuration The X6004 that was standing by is able to replace the broken down X6004 immediately Figure 188 ZyStack Standby Mode f BN Again the backup can not recreate the extensions created for analog phones of the X6004 that is down nor can it recreate the outside lines via the FXO ports FXS and FXO links are physical connections to an X6004 and can t be duplicated by a backup X6004 FXS extensions and FXO connections must be recreated in order so that they can be used again N X6004 User s Guide Chapter 23 ZyStack 23 2 ZyStack Setting Use this screen to view and manage your ZyStack settings Click Configuration gt ZyStack gt Settings in the navigation panel to view the screen as shown Figure 189 Configuration gt ZyStack gt Setting xin IPPBX 001 IPPBX 002 B Add amp Edit Delete c9 Reboot Localhost 172 23 37 201 192 168 1 13 LAN Master BA secondary 172 23 23 234 192 168 1 12 LAN Slave Kao The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 ZyStack gt Setting Reboot Delete LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID This field displays the system name of the X6004 Th
81. go back to Authority Group configuration page without saving your changes 14 3 12 FXS Extension Call Forward Screen Use this screen to set up call forwarding and call blocking rules for your extension To access this screen click the Call Forward tab in any ofthe FXS extension configuration screens Figure 118 FXS Extension Call Forward Call Forward Setting Call Forward M sun M Mon M Tue M wed IV Thu M Fri M sat Time 00 00 oo oo Office Hours Office Hours DND Do Not Disturb Disable Blind Forward Disable Busy Forward Disable No Answer Forward C Disable After Office Hours Disable Call Blocking Setting Black list Disable Block the calls without Caller G Disable C Enable White List b C voice Mail C Enable Extension Number C voice Mail C Enable Extension Number voice Mail Enable Find Me List b C voice Mail C Enable Extension Number voice Mail C Enable BlackList p C Enable Apply Back to Peer List The fields in this screen are the same as the fields for SIP extension call forwarding screen Refer to Table 43 on page 136 for detailed field descriptions 14 3 13 FXS Extension Voice Mail Screen Use this screen to set up a voice mail settings for this extension To access this screen click the Voice Mail tab in any of the FXS extension configuration screens X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Figur
82. group pickup for this extension Personal IVR Enter the code used to edit personal configuration for an extension via the handset Voice Mail Enter the code used to access voice mail on the X6004 Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Auto Provision This chapter shows you how to set up auto provisioning for the SIP clients of the X6004 8 1 Auto Provisioning Overview Auto provisioning allows administrators to configure VoIP related settings on ZyXEL s SIP clients from a central location You can set up and maintain a configuration file associated with a SIP extension on the X6004 Auto provisioning has the VoIP devices periodically download the configuration file from the X6004 BES Check the documentation that came with your ZyXEL softphone IP phone ATA or other device to see if it supports auto provisioning The configuration file contains the settings you configure for a specific telephone extension in your organization It also contains SIP settings necessary for the device to register with the X6004 The configuration file is encrypted using 3DES Triple Data Encryption Standard See Chapter 14 on page 125 for more information on extensions and Chapter 7 on page 95 for more information on SIP settings 8 1 1 How to Configure Auto Provisioning Take the following steps to configure auto provi
83. how to manage the DSP resources on the X6004 12 14 DSP Overview The X6004 uses Digital Signal Processing DSP modules to convert analog audio to digital signals and vice versa DSP modules are classified by the number of channels they are capable of processing A normal phone conversation takes up two channels since the X6004 must encode the outgoing analog audio while simultaneously decoding the incoming digital audio The X6004 contains an onboard DSP module it is also equipped with a single removable DSP module by default You can upgrade the existing DSP module with one that can process more channels You can also install a second module to increase the number of calls the X6004 can handle simultaneously See the product specification in Appendix on page 283 for details about the DSP modules on the X6004 This chapter shows you how to install and uninstall the DSP modules on the X6004 It also discusses how to manage the DSP resources on the X6004 12 1 1 Installing a Second DSP Module Take the following steps to install a second Digital Signal Processor in your X6004 1 Ensure the power is off and all cables are disconnected Lay the X6004 upside down on a flat dry surface The DSP hatch is located on the base of the X6004 2 Unscrew and remove the DSP hatch screw Remove the DSP hatch cover 4 Insert the DSP module s contacts into the connector socket at an angle as shown in the figure 5 Gently press the DSP module downwards unt
84. i o Eco MLU Li annona 65 Toe S TOE CI b ui sonne eet 68 teble gt Tutorial Voicemail SOHIngpS 1 iecace cire tacet ivre rd ia ce erre ea i a 70 Table 7 Tutorial Basic Web Phone Call Features eeeeseeissseeei eise nennen tta danni nth aa san taa da 72 Table 8 Navigation Buttons Sub links OVerviBW 1 iere rrr rho rninn iE REPE RARE TORIA SEEN MEPI RA ERES MAR 78 Table 92 Navigation Fanal LINKS 2 c trn rrt tain taa ER PRO SER EHI ES CERO ESSE KERETAXS GRE REL TE X PRI LR Fr d dd 78 Tabl TEL DASD Luudsectcdscuupu dd ebria Udine P aaa nl Elda ia RUE A QU I EPA EXE EDEN edu E oH LSU nb dues M iM ua bonnets 80 IE Xu creadmdecncousMro Me Bn 82 Table 12 Configuration gt Network gt LAN Loss Pac Sa exlra c ao Pa ler be S edd 86 Table 13 Configuration Network gt WAN Lucassapeiaia xr PP in Re b nn qu Po Cu adds heh dade Co v ada ee fuvd E RA DIEA 87 Table 14 Configuration Network DDNS icis coaster etat repa ere nop 33 RRY Fast ade EN eo e FENCE ec et Ade eU Er E 88 Table 15 Conhigurabon o BSR 9 BIT EE 5ssaucs qe eph rebat E bPR Pa pe bLE brad NRI R RR FEX naai DA uA Ca aS KHEN CT EF ded 89 Table 16 Configuration gt Network gt Static Route 1 ker ett shot a ninina Ena ton E REP PIRE ERI IE 91 Table 17 Configuration gt Network gt Static Route gt Add ssssssssssssssseeeemm ent 91 Table 18 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt
85. information 3 1 Making Internal Calls This tutorial sets up the internal telephone extensions on your network At the end of this tutorial you should be able to call between extensions The next figure shows the telephone extensions 1001 1010 configured in this tutorial All of the extensions are members of an authority group called Basic you need to create an authority group before configuring extensions see Chapter 2 on page 37 for more information The figure also shows an internal call between extensions 1001 and 1009 Figure 10 Internal Calls Basic 1004 1005 3 1 1 Configure SIP Extensions The following section introduces how to create the authority group called Basic and ten SIP extensions 1001 to 1010 on the X6004 The number of extensions you can create 1s limited by your service subscription see Section 31 1 1 on page 259 Procedure 1 In the web configurator click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group to open the following screen Figure 11 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group Authority Group Authority Group Extension Number Query iadd PR Advance dit Bl Delete a NENNEN ONCE X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Click the Add icon to open the following screen Enter the name of the group Basic in this example and click Add The Machine ID field is a name automatically assigned to the X6004
86. is called the parking slot number X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services Table 90 Call Parking Progression CALLER A X6004 CALLER B 6 Caller B walks to another extension and reconnects to the call with A by dialing followed by the parking slot number Conversation between caller A and B continues 22 7 1 Call Parking Configuration Use this screen to configure call parking on the X6004 Click Configuration gt PBX gt Call Settings gt Call Park to view the Call Parking screen Figure 186 Call Parking Configuration Call Parking Call Parking Representative Number 00 Amount of Parking Position ZyStack 16 Parking Time 180 sec Apply Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 Call Parking Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Call Parking Setting Representative Enter the telephone number users should dial to park a telephone call Number Amount of Enter the number of call parking extensions available This also establishes the Parking range of numbers that users will have to dial to retrieve a parked call Position ZyStack Parking Time Enter the maximum number of seconds that a call can be parked After a parked call exceeds this amount of time it is routed back to the original extension that parked the call Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Res
87. line group name of this SIP trunk User Name This field displays the SIP authentication user name associated with the SIP account used for this SIP trunk Host This field displays the IP address of the SIP server for the SIP server associated with this SIP trunk Port This field displays the port number used for SIP communication with a SIP server Registration This field displays online if the X6004 successfully registered with the SIP server Status for this SIP trunk offline if the X6004 failed to register with the SIP server for this SIP trunk or Auth Sent if the X6004 is in the process of registering with the SIP server associated with this SIP trunk Call Status This field displays busy if a SIP line is currently engaged otherwise it displays idle X6004 User s Guide 227 Chapter 25 Status Observation X6004 User s Guide System Log This chapter contains information about configuring log settings and viewing the X6004 s logs 26 1 System Log Overview The X6004 monitors different aspects of its operations and can be configured to record events based on the source of the event The following are sources of events for which the X6004 can create logs IPPBX activities related to the PBX functions of the X6004 Some examples include an FXS interface card failure new SIP extension created or ZyStack member failure User activities related to administrator account activities Some examples in
88. local phonebook entry department This field displays the department field value of the local phonebook entry Add Edit Click the Add icon to configure a new entry in the local phonebook Delete Click the Edit icon to change the values of an existing local phonebook entry Click the Delete icon to remove an entry from the local phonebook 11 3 2 Local Phonebook Add Edit Screen The screens for editing or adding entries to the local phonebook contain the same fields Only the screen used to add local phonebook entries is shown below Use this screen to configure phonebook entries on the X6004 Click the Add or Edit icon in the Local Phonebook screen to view the screen as shown LES Only the Add Local Phonebook screen is shown In the Edit Local Phonebook screen some of the fields are read only X6004 User s Guide Chapter 11 Phonebook Figure 98 Local Phonebook Add Edit Screen New PBX Phonebook name ext home mobile e mail logon name country department Local Phonebook Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 31 Local Phonebook Add Edit Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION New Edit PBX Use these fields to add or edit local phonebook entries Phonebook Note You must fill in the name field in order to save this local phonebook entry All the other fields can be left blank name Type a name value for this local phonebook ent
89. number you entered in the SIP Server Port field SIP Service Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after the Domain symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group Table 67 Configure a SIP Trunk LABEL DESCRIPTION DTMF Mode Control how the X6004 handles the tones that the IP phones on your network make when they push their buttons One use of the tones is to distinguish between numbers when trying to dial a PSTN phone number You should use the same mode as your VoIP service provider The choices are rfc2833 Follow the RFC 2833 standard and send the DTMF tones in RTP packets inband Send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 can distort the tones info Send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Caller ID Select this if you want to send identification when you make VoIP phone calls Clear this if you do not want to send identification Authentication Username Type the SIP user name associated with this extension The IP phone registering with the X6004 must provide this for authentication Password Type the SIP password associated with this extension The IP phone registering with the X6004 must provide this for authentication Code
90. numbers where you might be located Call Blocking set up a list of telephone numbers that you don t want to receive calls from Or stop calls without caller ID from reaching your extension Voice Mail Forwarding Configure the X6004 to forward your voice mail messages to your e mail account 14 3 1 Add Multiple SIP Peers Use this screen to configure a range of extensions for IP phones on your network To access this screen click Add SIP Peers in the Authority Group configuration screen Figure 107 Add Multiple SIP Extensions Authority Group Add SIP Peers Group Sales z Start Number Step Interval Amount Ea SIP Auth Password prefixl Postfix DTMF Mode info x CODEC Setting D D ESQ G 723 1 G 726 o H 263 H 261 o H 264 pass through Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 40 Add Multiple SIP Extensions LABEL DESCRIPTION Add SIP Peers Group Select the authority group you want these extensions to belong to X6004 User s Guide 131 Chapter 14 Authority Group Table 40 Add Multiple SIP Extensions LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Number Type the first extension number for this range of extensions Extensions can be from 1 to 20 digits long Step Interval Type the value of the increment which the X6004 uses to create this range of extensions Amount Type the number of extensions you want to cr
91. odi ux Logan pepe a aac Lx uL add 204 22 7 1 Call Parking COPTIQUEBUDD xuusasesccor icone bocr torre beobt anna E AER Si 205 Chapter 23 Fic 207 Vrae ioci aeter 207 VS Ea S e IET SICCO Doo oo 207 22 1 2 ZyStack Failover Mode JCING Luusiiscdisesstop na trp Ita n e kl Hd dl qutd ii ha 4a nde 207 23 1 3 ZyStack Failover Moda Standby Liuius eaeessans hdd tak kh pati ko rtt RES dr dk RA dg conde 208 232 cr d 209 LENO AOI SOME aocieusoxeiedoarnededsduen ust paisdasde on ap cen d gu fen Rd 209 Pee EXO dus pucr MM e 210 29 3 2yorack intemal Cal ROUNDI T 211 e CV MUTI E cT 212 LANA AEAN E nhan RANS es a 213 T cr e Bie 1 E e mr 213 Part IV Monitor Log amp Maintenance s 217 Chapter 24 System InfoFIVallom 2 i iota prece deba Vei eno d ed dr y 6 LDb FED ACRI TER UEER CR d oa eea eV n KU ER OU FOE KA Iuda 219 24 1 System Information OVOFVIOW ivicis sciceceious sacadavetss sanedwoth andendu omiani E Eb b KE ILES UP CIR E ENEE 219 Chapter 25 vid ER IW ATION MET 223 25 1 SIP Peer SIBIUS 1sessescaavesseuasacesFutbesavis auus aurka a SUP APENcS NAN EUR AES EE DUAL A PRUSSBUL 2 MPE SR UL E 223 DFAS POT O UE e 224 TFAO TTO scr am N rrr arrest ricer ce trreerre ter 225 204 SIP cur M
92. of all criteria X6004 User s Guide Maintenance This chapter shows you how to create and manage administrator accounts on the X6004 28 1 Administrator Accounts The X6004 has a default administrator account named admin You can also configure up to four additional accounts with different privilege levels on the X6004 The X6004 supports the following types of accounts Full admin This account can perform all configuration changes Debug admin This account has the same privilege level as the full admin account This type of account may be assigned to service technicians to perform additional diagnostics on the X6004 Read only This account can only view settings on the X6004 28 2 Administrator Account Screen Use the Administrator Username Password screen to change the password of the currently logged in administrator Click Maintenance gt Administrator Username Password to view the screen as shown next Figure 212 Maintenance gt Administrator Username Password admin Username Password Setup Old Password Username Password Confirm Password Apply Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance Each field is described in the following table Table 114 Maintenance gt Administrator Username Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Old Password Type the existing password for the currently logged in administrator account Username Type the new usern
93. of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C 19yy name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the n
94. on page 265 for more information 8 Ifthe IP phone is from ZyXEL and supports auto provisioning use section Section 3 1 4 on page 46 to map the SIP extensions to your network s SIP devices 3 1 2 Connect IP Phones You can now set up your IP phones The next figure shows the network connections of the IP phones and the X6004 In this example all of the IP phones and the X6004 are connected to an Ethernet switch and are all assigned IP addresses in the same subnet Figure 17 Connect IP Phones IP 172 23 37 201 IP 172 23 37 101 X 1001 1002 1004 1005 MS x cm 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 3 1 3 Register IP Phones After your network connections have been made you can proceed with the SIP registration of the IP phones on your network The next figure shows a typical SIP registration screen of a ZyXEL IP phone This is a sample screen only but it includes all the key fields necessary to complete a SIP registration It shows the SIP registration of an IP phone with the extension 1001 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 1 4 Auto Provisioning Figure 18 Example IP Phone SIP Registration Screen SIP Settings SIP Account M Active Number SIP Local Port SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domains M Send Caller ID Voice Mail Number T DNS SRV Authentication User Name Password fi 0
95. on this outbound line group If you want to forward all incoming calls on this SIP trunk to be forwarded to a fax machine located at a specific extension then select FAX Extension This field is only available if you select FAX in the Apply AA field Type the Number for Fax extension of the Fax machine you want to forward calls to Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to go to the Outbound Group screen without saving your changes 18 5 1 Configuring Direct Inward Dialing Settings Use this screen to setup Direct Inward Dialing DID mappings for the X6004 Click the DID Mapping button in the Auto Attendant screen to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group Figure 149 DID Mapping Setting DID Mapping Setting Partial Mapping C Enable Disable Match Part First C Last Match Digit s a Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 69 DID Mapping Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Partial Mapping Select Enable to have the X6004 inspect either the first or the last digits of incoming telephone numbers and to check them against the extensions configured on the X6004 Select Disable to have the X6004 inspect the entire telephone number of incoming calls against the extensions configured on the X6004 Match Part Specify whether to inspect the first or the last set of digits of incoming ca
96. or implied warranty BES This Product includes expat 1 95 8 software under the Expat License X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements Expat License BS Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE This Product includes openssl 0 9 8a software under the OpenSSL License OPENSSL licence Copyright c 1998 2000 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution
97. phonebook information from the LDAP server Local Phonebook Use this section to download the local phonebook from the X6004 to your local Export Import computer or another location on your network or to upload a text file containing your phonebook entries to the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 11 Phonebook Table 28 Configuration PBX Server Configuration Phonebook LABEL DESCRIPTION Export phonebook Click Export to save your local phonebook to your local computer or another file location on your network A screen appears prompting you for a location to download your phonebook file Import phonebook Type the path to or click Browse and locate the text file containing a local file phonebook Then click Import to upload the phonebook file to the X6004 The X6004 displays the Import Phonebook screen which allows you to review the local phonebook entries before saving them to the X6004 11 2 1 Import Phonebook Screen The following screen appears after you click Import in the Phonebook Config screen Figure 95 Import Phonebook Screen Import Phonebook Import Phonebook name Test Tomasz H Oni 4444 5000 r 5555555 0955555555 test test com USA sales 12 x 2233344 098887878787 thasinskigyahoo com Tomasz H United R Apply Cancel Review the phonebook entries and click Apply to save this phonebook to the X6004 This overrides a
98. sign up Enter them in the Primary DNS and Secondary DNS server fields in the Configuration gt Network gt WAN screen 6 3 2 Configure WAN Settings Use this screen to set up a connection with the ISP or the default gateway router To access this screen click Configuration gt Network gt WAN X6004 User s Guide Chapter 6 Network Deployment Figure 76 Configuration Network WAN WAN Ethernet TCP IP Settings C Get automatically from ISP ene static IP Default Rmms2 IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 13 Configuration gt Network gt WAN LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN Ethernet TCP IP Settings Get automatically from ISP Select this if your ISP did not assign you a static IP address Click Renew to send a request to the DHCP server for a new IP address Static IP Default Select this if your ISP or network administrator assigned you a static IP address IP Address Enter the IP address provided by your ISP or network administrator Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask your ISP or network administrator provided for the remote node Default Gateway Enter the IP address your ISP or network administrator provided for the default gateway to the Internet Primary DNS Enter the IP address of the DNS server your ISP or network administrator provided to yo
99. sound recording software Sound Recorder on Windows 2000 From your desktop click Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Entertainment gt Sound Recorder X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant Figure 156 Sound Recorder 4 Sound Sound Recorder loj xl File Edit Effects Help Position Length 0 00 sec 0 00 sec 2 Record your audio file When you are ready to record press the Record button A When you are finished recording press the Stop button B Press the Play button C to review your recording Figure 157 Recording Audio 4j Sound Sound Recorder O xl File Edit Effects Help Position Length 0 00 sec E 0 00 sec A 3 Save your audio file In Sound Recorder press File gt Save As Type a name for the audio file in the File name field and then click Change to make sure that the file is saved in correct format Figure 158 Saving Audio Files zx Saem t Dekep degam My Computer SE My Network Places illEveryOnceInA While File name adil wav Save as lype Sounds wav Cancel Forme PCM 22 050 kHz 8 Bit Mono change 4 Specify the file format In the Sound Selection window Choose CCITT p Law in the Format field Next select the playback sound quality by choosing the frequency of the playback audio file Higher frequency results in better sound but larger file size Typically the setting 8 000 kHz 8 Bit Mono 7 kb sec is suffici
100. such as WinRAR The resulting uncompressed files are MySQL database files that can be managed via a MySQL DBMS Database Management System See Section 27 1 2 on page 239 Note The X6004 can store only three CDR backup files at a time If you create a new backup file when you already have three files created then the oldest backup file is deleted from the system X6004 User s Guide Chapter 27 Call Detail Record CDR Table 111 Report LOGS CDR Backup List LABEL DESCRIPTION Forward Check the boxes next to the files you want to forward to the administrator email address and click the Forward button The files you forward to an administrator are deleted from the X6004 Delete If you no longer want to store a CDR file on the X6004 then check the boxes next to the files you want to delete from the X6004 and click the Delete button Backup Now Click the Backup Now button to save a CDR file on the X6004 27 4 CDR Query Screen Use this screen to configure search criteria for call records on the X6004 You also use this screen to execute your query and create CDR reports Click Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt CDR Query to view the screen as shown next Figure 210 Report LOGS CDR CDR Query CDR Query Query Condition Start Time Direction Call Time Talk Time Caller Group Channel Caller Number Dialed Number Setting Show Items
101. table Table 123 Maintenance gt License Control gt Registration LABEL DESCRIPTION Device If you select Existing myZyXEL com account only the User Name and Registration Password fields are available New If you haven t created an account at myZyXEL com select this option and myZyXEL com configure the following fields to create an account and register your X6004 account Existing If you already have an account at myZyXEL com select this option and enter your myZyXEL com user name and password in the fields below to register your X6004 account User Name Enter a user name for your myZyXEL com account The name should be between 6 20 alphanumeric characters Underscores are allowed but spaces are not Check Click this button to check with the myZyXEL com database to verify the user name you entered has not been used X6004 User s Guide Chapter 31 myZyXEL com Table 123 Maintenance gt License Control gt Registration LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Enter a password of between 6 20 alphanumeric characters Underscores are allowed but spaces are not Confirm Enter the password again for confirmation Password E Mail Address Enter your e mail address You can use up to 80 alphanumeric characters periods and the underscore are also allowed without spaces Country Select your country from the drop down box list Apply Click this to save your changes 31
102. the table Group Name This field displays the name of an authority group LCR or ring group to which you can configure a link Description This field displays the description of the group to which you can create a link Group Type This field identifies whether you are creating a link to Authority Group another set of extensions on the X6004 LCR an outbound dialing rule containing outbound line groups Ring Group a group of extensions in a page group hunt group or both Associations Select this checkbox to link a group you are configuring to another group Clear this checkbox to remove a link between the group you are configuring and another group Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the previous screen X6004 User s Guide Call Services This chapter shows you how to configure and use call services on the X6004 22 1 Call Services Overview The following table summarizes call services available on the X6004 Table 82 Call Services Summary FEATURE DESCRIPTION Call Emergency Configure emergency numbers which the X6004 treats with the highest priority Even if all outbound lines from the X6004 are busy the X6004 will drop an existing FXO channel and allow an emergency call to complete See Section 22 2 on page 198 Meet me Conference Configure conference room extensions Callers from within and outside your organization can join conference
103. transmitted by the X6004 from the phones on your network via the specified FXO lines 6 is the quietest and 6 is the loudest X6004 User s Guide Chapter 7 SIP Server Table 19 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXO LABEL DESCRIPTION Listening Volume Select the volume level transmitted by the X6004 to the phones on your network for calls via the FXO lines 6 is the quietest and 6 is the loudest Busy Detect The X6004 listens for a tone to detect if an FXO line has been hung up This tone differs by region and it may also differ slightly between carriers In some cases the X6004 may mistake background noise for a busy line signal This setting defines the number of busy tones the X6004 needs to recognize before actually considering the line to be busy You should select a low value if you have a good connection Select a higher value if your FXO connection is of lower quality to avoid false hang ups Country Code The signals used to indicate a busy line or an available line differ by country You must select the country code for the location of the X6004 The X6004 can then recognize whether the FXO line is in use or available Select default to reset the country code value to the factory defaults Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 7 3 2 Configure FXS Settings
104. up e button Adjust the speaker Use the 4 slider on the left of the keypad volume Adjust the microphone volume Use the amp slider on the right of the keypad Mute the speakers and the microphone Click the Mute button below the keypad Use the phone book Click the Phone Book tab to the right of the web phone The phone book appears displaying your contact list Select what you want to search for a name or extension number for instance from the drop down list enter the search term in the box and click on the magnifying glass to search You can also arrange the contact list entries by clicking on one of the headings X6004 User s Guide PART II Web Configurator amp Network Setup The Web Configurator 75 Deployment 85 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 5 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy X6004 setup and management via an Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default
105. view the screen as shown Figure 146 Add Edit SIP Trunk Outbound Group SIP Trunk Machine ID Group Name Description Prex oot s p Apply Back to Outbound Group Each field is described in the following table Table 66 Add Edit SIP Trunk LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID Select the ID of the X6004 on which you want to configure the SIP trunk This is an internal name not configurable of the X6004 Only one choice is shown if you have not configured ZyStack This field is not available when editing a SIP trunk configuration Group Name Type the name of this SIP trunk You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are not allowed Description Type the description for this SIP interface You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are allowed Apply Click this to save your changes Back to Outbound Click this to go to the Outbound Line Group screen without saving your changes Group Cancel 18 4 2 Configure a SIP Trunk Use this screen to configure a SIP trunk Click the Advanced icon in the SIP Trunk section of the Outbound Line Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group Figure 147 Configure a SIP Trunk Outbound Line Group Authentication CODEC Setting SIP Setting Number 700 SIP Local Port Boso SIP Server Address 72201309 SIP Server Port Boso REGISTER Se
106. 0000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 137 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET SUl OGEN 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bitmask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bitmask 11111111 11111111 11111141 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs ofall zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bi
107. 01 5060 1024 65535 172 23 37 201 5060 1024 65535 fi 72 23 37 201 5060 1024 65535 fi 72 23 37 201 1001 1001 pees SIP Password Prefix Extension Postfix Advance Setup EXAMPLE Extension Number of IP Phone IP Address of the X6004 Complete the SIP registration for all the IP phones on your network When all the phones are registered you can make internal calls by dialing the extension number assigned to each phone A ZyXEL IP phone that supports auto provisioning can get a configuration text file from the X6004 see Appendix on page 283 for supported IP phones The configuration file contains the SIP settings that the SIP device uses to register with the X6004 The following graphic shows an IP phone A softphone B VoIP gateway C and ATA D downloading configuration text files from the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 19 Auto Provisioning After you configure the SIP extensions see Section 3 1 1 on page 42 and make your network connections see Figure 17 on page 45 use the following directions to map each SIP extension to the appropriate SIP device You need the MAC address of each SIP device or the serial number if it is a softphone 1 Click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision Then click a SIP extension s Edit icon Figure 20 Configuration PBX Server Configuration Auto Provision
108. 02 overview 197 calling emergency numbers 198 calls between extensions 39 conference 199 to ITSP 37 to PSTN 37 CDR X6004 User s Guide 327 Index aged files 239 and MySQL 239 backup results 241 local database 239 management 240 overview 239 report screen 244 types of files 239 viewing results 242 CDR Call Detail Record 239 certifications 317 notices 318 viewing 318 changing privilege level 247 codecs and SIP trunk 169 and trusted peers 173 conference call and DSP usage 199 configuration 200 overview 199 conference room 199 configuration backup 253 configuration file 253 configuration text file 46 configuration saving 82 configure SIP extensions 42 connecting IP telephones 45 connecting to ITSP 55 connecting to PSTN 49 contact information 321 copyright 317 create authority group tutorial 42 current status 249 customer support 321 D debug admin 245 default IP addresses 284 deployment and auto provisioning 46 diagnostics 249 collecting information 249 network traffic information 249 packet capture 250 status check 249 dial condition 38 dial condition example 53 60 dialing rules 59 DID configuration 170 mapping rules 171 partial match 171 DID Direct Inward Dialing 170 DiffServ 107 Digital Signal Processing DSP 35 dimensions 283 Direct Inward Dialing see DID 170 disclaimer 317 distinctive ring 202 setup 203 DND 268 white list 269 DSCP 107 DSP and conference ca
109. 04 on which you want to configure this pickup group This field is read only when editing an existing pickup group Group name Type a name for this pickup group Use alpha numeric characters and spaces are not allowed This field is read only when editing an existing pickup group Description Type a description for this pickup group Use alpha numeric characters and spaces are not allowed This field is read only when editing an existing pickup group Extensions Select Click on an extension in the Extensions Pool column to highlight it and use the Right icon to move it to the Extensions Select column This adds this extension to the pickup group Click on an extension in the Extensions Select column to highlight it and use the Left icon to move it to the Extensions Pool column This removes this extension from the pickup group Note You must make sure that Group Pickup is enabled in the Advanced section of the SIP or FXS extension configuration page Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group gt Edit FXS Peer Edit SIP Peer Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the previous screen X6004 User s Guide Chapter 16 Pickup Group X6004 User s Guide Call Access Code This chapter shows you how to configure a call access code for authority groups and how to set a maximum length for extensions 17 1 Call Access Code The call access
110. 1 amp i Delete Each field is described in the following table Table 77 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select the LCRs that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button LCR Name This is the name of the LCR X6004 User s Guide Chapter 20 LCR Table 77 Configuration PBX Outbound Line Management LCR LABEL DESCRIPTION Description This text describes the LCR Add Edit Delete Click Add to create a new LCR Click Edit to change the settings of an existing LCR Click Delete to remove an existing LCR 20 2 1 LCR Configuration Use this screen to choose the outbound line groups and create dialing conditions for an LCR To access this screen click the Add or Edit icon in the Dial Condition List section of the LCR screen to view the screen as shown BS Only the Add LCR screen is shown In the Edit LCR screen some of the fields are read only BS Before you can configure any dial conditions for an LCR you must first configure the LCR Data section of this screen and click Apply Figure 169 LCR Configuration LCR List LCR Item LCR Data LCR Name Description Max Call Time sec Poot Selected IPPBX _001 SIP1 o Outbound line group IPPBX _001 FXO1 IPPBX O01 trusyti g Apply Cancel Dial Condition List Delete Gi Add E Edit fil Delete E Dial Condition
111. 1 Information Collect Use this screen to capture running configuration details on the X6004 You can download and save the configuration detail file in a compressed file format A service technician may request that you send this file for troubleshooting Click Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Information Collect to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 29 Diagnostics Figure 216 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Information Collect Information Collect Information Collect Machine ID File Download Filename Last Modified Size IPPBX 001 7 Collect Now Each field is described in the following table Table 118 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Information Collect LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID If you have more than one X6004 configured in a ZyStack select the one from which you want to collect information Collect Now Click Collect Now to capture the configuration details of the X6004 Note It takes about 1 minute to perform the data collection Do not try to browse to other screens while the capture is in progress Filename This field displays the name of the compressed file which holds the running configuration details The file naming convention is diaginfo YYYYMMDD tar gz where YYYY is the year MM is the month and DD is the day of the month on which the capture took place The file can b
112. 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 144 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 144 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 145 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO ORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 146 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NOST ERE SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0
113. 23 37 201 Connected to 172 23 37 201 220 ProFTPD 1 2 10 Server ProFTPD Default Installation User 172 23 37 201 none admin 331 Password required for admin 230 User admin logged in 200 Type set to I ftp put ZLD current 200 PORT command successful 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for ZLD current 226 path etc zyxel ftp tmp ZLD current 226 firmware verifying 226 firmware updating 226 Please Wait about 5 minutes 226 Do not poweroff or reset 226 system will reboot automatically after finished updating 226 Transfer complete 226 copy firmware file etc zyxel ftp tmp ZLD current 226 Receive firmware success 226 System reboot automatically lt gt Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 30 3 2 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 122 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login The X6004 requires Normal login type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Transfer Type Transfer files in either A
114. 2302HWUDL with built in SIP processing which allow traditional analog phones or cordless phones to use them as a link to the IP PBX D ATAs Analog Telephone Adapters for example ZyXEL s P 2024 aggregate a large number of analog phones and convert their signal into IP packets E Peer IP PBXs Other SIP based IP PBXs with which you communicate over an IP network This allows you to call the telephones connected to the peer IP PBX without going through a telephone service provider F SIP Servers Servers D located at your Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP which process outgoing calls from the X6004 and direct them to IP phones on the Internet or traditional phones on the PSTN Figure 2 SIP Devices and the X6004 1 1 2 PBX Telephony Features The X6004 allows you to set up and manage features on an internal telephone network without relying on your telephone service provider The following are just a few examples Conference calls Voicemail Call Forwarding The X6004 integrates with your IP network For example you can X6004 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your X6004 Import an LDAP based Lightweight Directory Access Protocol contact list to serve as the phonebook for the IP phones on your network Set up the X6004 to send users email notifications or complete voice messages as attachments when they receive voicemail 1 1 3 Scalable Design The X6004 can be used stand alone to pr
115. 4 that has failed This feature is limited to a single routing domain e 23 1 2 ZyStack Failover Mode Active In the active mode failover all the X6004 participating in the ZyStack are also actively participating in the processing of phone calls The ZyStack forms a ring with each X6004 serving as a backup for the X6004 one step higher in its hierarchy The hierarchy is organized in the order that each X6004 joined the ZyStack The first X6004 is the master and it is backed up by the X6004 that was the second member of the ZyStack The second member is backed up by the third and so on Finally the master serves as a backup to the last member to join the ZyStack The following figure illustrates the active mode failsafe X6004 User s Guide 207 Chapter 23 ZyStack Figure 187 ZyStack Active Mode QNS ru E When one of the X6004 fails then its backup X6004 services the SIP clients that used to connect to the X6004 The backup can not however recreate extensions created for the analog phones on the X6004 that is down nor can it recreate the outside lines via the FXO ports FXS and FXO links are physical connections to an X6004 and can t be duplicated by a backup X6004 FXS extensions and FXO connections must be recreated in order so that they can be used again 23 1 3 ZyStack Failover Mode Standby In standby mode one of the X6004s does not actively participate in the processing of phone calls It only
116. 45 Add Edit Hunt Group Sereg uuiencsiriexe pa Er ERREICHEN S a 149 152 0 Paging Group EXMP nad ea hi eda a e ria ea o con e ERR RD 150 Chapter 16 PEKU PO UD cusseced End iix bu Esc VE eei 155 16 1 Pickup Group OVON aigrir a S 155 16 1 1 Pick p Group Seling ius ioviatvaxissidece iniaeeai oeii Eia 156 16 1 2 Add Edit PICKIN GrOUPS sisiisi ninadepiena emaa a aiea sd Red va cu d bp aaia ees 156 Chapter 17 Gal Accoss ang m aes 159 17 1 Call Access COKE C SM 159 T5143 Sel Call Access Code cree Lairissa ee RU veta det a a d Lian 160 JE urbes RE a E m 160 Chapter 18 Ben NL ith lp N 163 158 1 Ouibound Line Group L VERIEM 2 5 Le ode oto Le RD Deve Dad d ace 163 T8 2 Outbound Line Group Serer Lco tems reta Leere te EYE podre enam de c Ra ER LEE aa da line 164 18 3 FXO TRUNK COMNGUFAUON e 164 X6004 User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 15 3 T ABdEdIE FAO TORK iiec prt ett ep Eh ert E e adt ad Lee rep d tonne 165 18 3 2 Configure a FXO TNK aem e 165 18 3 3 Auto Attendant for Incoming Calls 1 cucine rena ditt teta 166 ipm WE Scl I E 166 14 PCG AUI PP 167 194 2 COnhgure a SIP TUNK A 167 18 5 Auto Attendant for SIP Trunks 2uiaoaecie dixic eicere La et ae cct nb ka cnr vad 170 18 5 1 Configuring Direct Inward Dialing Setting
117. 7 Call Detail Record CDR 27 2 CDR Management Screen Use this screen to set up an external server to collect CDR information You can also configure an administrator e mail address to send alerts and CDR files for later viewing Click Report gt LOGS CDR Management to view the screen as shown next Figure 208 Report LOGS CDR Management Management Management Database Usage Generate CDR Alert Aged File E mail Address Database Location Remote Server Server Username Password 126 20000 um os internal call IV enable mail to admin Apply Each field is described in the following table Table 110 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Management Database Usage The X6004 can collect around 20000 records on the local CDR database This field indicates the total number of records currently held by the database When the local database is full the X6004 removes all the CDRs from the local database and creates an Aged File a compressed file containing all the CDRs Use the Aged File field to specify how to deal with the compressed file containing the CDRs Generate CDR Check the internal call checkbox if you want the X6004 to record internal calls Internal calls are calls from one extension to another extension configured on the X6004 Uncheck this box if you do not want the X6004 to record internal calls
118. 7 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt Local Phonebook 117 Figure 98 Local Phonebook Add Edit SUFBOFT uiii uscire taa np ttt Let n EAR RARE SR EXV RR KE ARRA 43 118 Figure 99 installing a DSP MOduUIS t rT ER 120 Figure 100 Removing a DSP Module 142 iiic pe brt ttr ettet A Ebr td G e pet bed apap dua 120 Figure 101 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt DSP Management esses 121 Figure 102 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Office Hour ssssee 123 Figure 103 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group seessssss 127 Figure 104 d 4 p rye 42 5 dien TTRUM 128 Figure 105 Add Edit Authority GOUD m 129 Figure 105 Authority Group T GHDOQUKBUOFE dg eead edid te dat Lt uti D a o S na Rd eae ds 130 Figure 107 Add Multiple SIP Extensions 1s esee et ead spe ina Ent E a e dal ER LA Ea td Kd 131 Figure 108 Posi e 133 Figure TOS SIF Enrons BOSE auuissscxdiecsiveppt E ERHECAERUUH ROLES EURO EREEEREROAERUOR CLE EUER KR RARE EXON 134 Figure TIO SIF Exiension Cal FOE ausacesieseku iq ERO rH EPr TUN e ERREpHd de EE E IRI EPEE NEP FRDUL M ERPR ON EEHBUNN 135 x mun BRUN e 137 50 20070 2050 48 em 137 si al ont es a ls ieee eee erre 138 Figur TSIP Extensis Votes Mal uuusustecssixubvncceeev unctio
119. 9 Status Observation 223 System Log 229 Call Detail Record CDR 239 Maintenance 245 Diagnostics 249 System File Maintenance 253 myZyXEL com 259 217 System Information This chapter shows you how to view system information via the Monitor page 24 1 System Information Overview The System Information screen allows you to view essential information about the X6004 Click Monitor gt System Information in the web configurator to view the screen as shown Figure 197 Monitor System Information System Information System Information m 2yStack Status BackupBy _F W Version i LAN i d WAN 1 172 23 37 201 192 168 1 12 Master On 1 00 AVA 0 b3 Hardware Information m FXO Trunk SIP Trunk Trusted Peer Extension softphone 1 4 1 16 Device Monitor Flash HDD SIP FXS hy wD E gt a Each field is described in the following table Table 98 Monitor gt System Information LABEL DESCRIPTION System Information This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured then this screen displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack X6004 User s Guide Chapter 24 System Information Table 98 Monitor System Information continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address These two fields display the IP addresses of the of the WAN and LA
120. ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL S AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE
121. Address https 192 168 1 12 4 1 2 Accessing the Web Portal Take the following steps to access your phone account s web portal Open a web browser like Internet Explorer and enter the IP address you were given Figure 55 Tutorial Web Portal IP Address ZS Address https 192 168 1 12 0 Go ar X6004 User s Guide Chapter 4 Phone User Tutorial BS Don t forget the s in https this s indicates a secure IP address which means that communication between your computer and the X6004 including your phone calls cannot be intercepted by anyone else The following screen displays Figure 56 Tutorial Log In hen nf ZyXEL IPPBX X6004 Language English v Enter Extension number and PIN Code then click Login Extension 1001 Q PIN Code Enter Administrator Username and Password then click Login Username Password max 30 alphanumeric printable characters and no spaces Note Please turn on the Javascript and ActiveX control setting on I Explorer and trun o ppup window application Enter your extension number 1001 in the Extension field and enter your PIN code 5678 in the PIN Code field Click Login 4 1 3 Changing Your Security Information Itis very important that you change your security information as soon as possible since it could be guessed by others if it was generated automatically Figur
122. BX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Ring Group Edit Group Name This field displays the name of this ring group Description Type the description for this ring group You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are allowed Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 15 2 3 Configure Ring Group Settings Use this screen to create paging groups hunt groups or both To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Advanced Figure 124 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Advanced Paging Delete Giiadd S Edit f Delete A Entry Number a a mn 8888 page paging Delete Hunt Delete iadd E Edit f Delete Entry Number ac pan 4444 Ee EER Delete Each field is described in the following table Table 54 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Advanced LABEL DESCRIPTION Paging Use this section to manage page groups Delete Check the Delete box es and click Delete to remove page group s Entry Number This field displays the number you have to dial to call the extensions in this page group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 15 Ring Group Table 54 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Advanced
123. Basic ezout local_call long_distance_call international_call easy to call out local call LCR long distance call LCR international call LCR e Cancel Group Type Advanced Setting LCR Oo 3 You can now use the telephones that are part of the Basic authority group to make outbound calls using the PSTN connection The following figure summarizes the outbound call process for this example X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 37 Outbound Calls via PSTN The X6004 matches this number sends the call with the local call to 5555555 LCR applies the offset strips off the 0 5555555 Caller dials and routes the call to S 05555555 PSTN J S The X6004 3 3 Making ITSP Calls The following section shows you how to make and receive calls via a connection to the PSTN This example covers Connecting to ITSP configuring the outbound line group connection settings from the X6004 to the ITSP Dialing Rule for ITSP creating a rule which the tells the X6004 when to use the ITSP connection when completing outbound calls LCR to Authority Group Assignment giving extensions the right to make outbound calls via the ITSP connection Figure 38 Making ITSP Calls Caller dials 1212555555 The X6004 matches this number with an LCR applies an offset strips off the 1 add a dial plan prefix 016 to the start of the number and routes the cal
124. CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Appendix How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this 1s to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does Copyright C 19yy name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms
125. DESCRIPTION Rank This field displays the rank of an administrator account on the X6004 This field displays Full admin if this account is allowed to perform all configuration changes on the X6004 Debug admin If this account is allowed to perform all configuration changes on the X6004 This type of account is reserved for use by service technicians Read only if this account is only able to view configuration details on the X6004 Add Edit Delete Click Add to configure a new administrator account on the X6004 Click Edit to edit an existing administrator account on the X6004 Click Delete to remove an administrator account from the X6004 28 3 1 Add an Administrator Use this screen to create new administrator accounts To access this screen click Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Add Figure 214 Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Add Create a new administrator Username E Password 1 Confirm Password n Description E Rank Level Resdony Each field is described in the following table Table 116 Maintenance Administrator List Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Create a new administrator Username Type a username for this administrator You can use up to 25 alphanumeric characters Spaces are not allowed The first character must be a letter Password Type a password for this administrator account You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters and
126. Deployment This chapter shows you how to deploy the X6004 on your network 6 1 Network Deployment Overview The following diagram shows a sample network deployment of the X6004 The WAN port is connected to a DMZ interface on the default gateway router The X6004 uses the WAN interface to connect to a SIP server at the ITSP SIP IP devices use the WAN IP address of the X6004 to connect to it On the LAN SIP IP phones use the LAN IP address of the X6004 to connect to it Ss EE sm qu WEA 5 d be Internet DMZ Figure 74 Network Deployment Overview When you deploy the X6004 you must consider the following Ifthe X6004 has dynamically assigned IP address from your ISP then you should configure DDNS Dynamic DNS DDNS maps your dynamic IP address to a static domain name This allows the IP devices on the WAN to establish connections with the X6004 Ifthe X6004 is behind a firewall then you must make sure that you create firewall rules to let VoIP traffic pass through to the X6004 Ifthe X6004 is behind a NAT router then you must make sure that you configure forwarding rules for VoIP communication to get to the X6004 Ifthe IP phones on your LAN are located in different subnets then you have to configure static routes to ensure that the IP phones can connect to the X6004 and vice versa X6004 User s Guide Chapter 6 Network Deployment 6 2 LAN Configuration Use this screen
127. E ERU PIS RE EENNIGd RE RE POPE IDE RENE gd RE pUMI 119 121 2 Removing a DSP Modd iicet ropes GE dn Jp bu cea pat RS RU d 120 T22 DSP ceu a T T T T IU TUNIS 120 12 21 DSP Management Sred 121 Chapter 13 CIDCO POHES uio sie xho ge E RUPES E A EA 123 131 Office Hours Oveni aonscieotadieiidotatc Vn rbd etie Ea dani opa di edades ndr anda 123 To HG HOU COS acres erect crn dete lesen bel otis belate REED bei mE be ai da bebe Ete und eme dmeetuta 123 Chapter 14 Authority GFOUD crasco tnc n ina ERE EA Ra Kan cio KKa cnm RR cRa ns sxe Ka GRO Kb Rap BIN MERE KKERRERANGERKERAN KE NRNISNRKERRK ER EKIEQ AS 125 14 1 Extension Management CVervipW 11e tuex eon bad et Ret E d AER Ere Let Ex PG de aaa da 125 14 1 1 VOIE COO BUS oot totu Omg ER ere ti ta e ie pue pA d Aer Mat E EE 126 TOLL Vdeo COCOS essrnirescuis pact Seb iine ce ov Pubs EE dnt Econ simi E 66d 127 Mee ICTS TOUD srin n E E cin eased EE E E ASSE Dd da 127 14 2 1 Extension Query R SUL SOEGBEY duse ectkbpe iue gab nn RA 128 14 22 Ada Edl Athony GOUP anise Ao eben ce Da e ados d 128 14 2 3 Authority Group Configuration Screen sese 129 14 3 EXIGDSIODI FORUMS uncias pd ceci ARS Ier apRU Cete tbi tcr aU Cos E PRI LEO BIN Ea eU TbDR SE DUr d r 131 X6004 User s Guide Table of Contents 14 2 T Add Multiple SIPPeaLES iescssisssuxc skip c o v PR EVI AR ET aab EV Rr RC a d 131 Tee oe slam etre T 133 14 3 3 Configure SIP EXIGDSIOIS 2 cuuisiecciss
128. E et DW EE tea ER o d Hv en DER SUE PEU ERAI 108 SS SEIN oidtiisrre dir obe HE i a a REED LIE E RR UD adia VIE PLU DER E dad 108 Chapter 10 Tue MOM esc DIEI IMEEM MEM EM MUI A VE EM UE 111 10 1 Voice Mal DOSEPUIBMI ocisssestecuet Star dicEabekr ea bct debet ener eene SET buo Feet ESSE Ira ta EP DERE ECCE 0D 111 EO PUES I EZ c NT pee reuniveesssinencadnn 111 10 2 Voice Mall SGBO 1 2 E HI iP REDI IPIE UNE EHE 111 Chapter 11 PIDE cosa edere toc rt Oe CO Do REC U eW toD UEM Tz ITE Tec ZG ZR I MEO MEME 113 11 3 PGB GG VGN iussesussecect eat o EE HIR CE EE PELLE aeu e ES o eR docu eo Ea ep E de te EE Edad 113 TIAL DAP Based Phonebook 5 ce Ee pi itr FER Coa eO ER MEE EROd T dae epu deter o EM EROS 113 71 12 Local P RODeBDOK unes eiecti sica Aa a DEDI DD bbc PEL Q rra rode bore Sob ta 114 11 2 Phonebook Configuration Screen uuu eii epar e pa ak ced e e e na cca cd 114 TL Z 1 import Phonebook SEFSBIU iaiocesspi edens I E eaa ub HI TR E peu abb Po asic 115 THES LDAP PRODSDOOE SCHON 1222 prio end etre tuo eei pae EE bad Vett ita di teat b cdit Le v i YR pad 115 11 3 1 Local Phonebook Screen uoubecssrtidbd viakubsaR re EE DRE UB ER CER kx tuto x ER ERR E C KE UOI 117 11 3 2 Local Phonebook Add Edit Sreem 22 adsis torta eiue boc dH v bcc iaon ieii ober eder o cid 117 Chapter 12 DSP Management O O9 A U 0 0 G 119 cma cce ic MK T E ENE 119 12 1 1 installing a Second DSP Module si issue I E
129. EpL TM APER DEP PM DIU AR EE 141 dabo SU PAS EXIGBEIDB DESEE Laasitencusbivsoccdssbhenbeci doe de igo cia stuba desit tii pu p a SES vu tk d 142 Table 51 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group sse 145 Table 52 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Add sss 146 Table 53 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Edit sssssse 147 Table 54 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Advanced 147 Table 95 SADE RIE 2t 7 JV 148 Tabe OG isis ere FUN GrW aoina ds sce o om 149 Table 57 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group cccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 156 Table 58 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group Add Edit 157 Table 59 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access sss 159 Table 60 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code Edit Add 160 Table 61 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code gt Internal Extension Length 161 Table 62 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Group 164 THe Ss Add EJL
130. Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Add Ring Group Add Ring Group Machine ID Group Name Description IPPBX 001 Ada Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 52 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Ring Group Machine ID Select the ID of the X6004 on which you want to configure the ring group This is an internal name not configurable of the X6004 Only one choice is shown if you have not configured ZyStack Group Name Type the name of this ring group You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are not allowed Description Type the description for this ring group You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are allowed Add Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 15 2 2 Edit Ring Group Description Use this screen to change the description for a ring group To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Edit X6004 User s Guide Chapter 15 Ring Group Figure 123 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Edit Ring Group Edit Ring Group Edit Group Name NewRingGroup Description This is a Ring Group Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 53 Configuration gt P
131. FXS card failure User administrator activity such as a successful login myZyXEL com service registration with the myZyXEL com website Default All other logs generated by the X6004 For example failure to reach a DHCP server X6004 User s Guide 235 Chapter 26 System Log Table 108 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Internal Log LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Select whether you want to enable logging and the types of logs to record for each source of logs as described in the Log Category field The choices are Disable All Logs Do not log any events Enable Normal Logs Log all events excluding debug events Debug logs are used by service technicians and development engineers Enable All Logs Log all events E mail Server 1 2 Select whether you want to send logs to the e mail address of an administrator you specify in the Log Setting screen Enable Normal Logs Select this to send logs to an administrator at the time interval you specify in the Log Setting screen Enable Alert Log Select this to send e mail alerts to an administrator when emergency alert or critical level logs are created on the X6004 Log Consolidation Active Some logs may be so numerous that it becomes easy to ignore other important log messages Select this check box to merge logs with identical messages into one log Log Consolidation Period Specify t
132. Group Management OVODVIBW isses iacere tna nbi tht bad adis veanaadves rbd ade Eva eds Edid eee 191 21 1 1 Managing Aut one Groups 411 5 rne preti gade s Rt tcd S du sU its 191 21 1 2 Managing Outbound Line Groups edcanapekek edad ak e FRE EENRPETRRREXEHEe etm oeP pir erar ena k Ida 193 21 2 Group MANAGEMENT Soren e 195 21 2 1 Edit Group Management Associations eeasses eese eee tnnt nari thanh hn 195 Chapter 22 Gall oF VU OS A 197 22 1 Gall Services OVENS 197 X6004 User s Guide Table of Contents 222 Emsrgency Call CuielbviW isscxesbioastenqstirdan pda aa ae a b dated py ad a da ka ig a d t 198 22 2 1 Emergency Call CODIEJUEOHORE aus ccaceressicociatecencepmarsas sstzadareesosaadecancsamanesdisnnadanaddeaes 198 22 3 Conference Calling Overdie uuoscscccsieitdik perite bebe ttis s ainiaan naia vk t bat ei ebbe i ices 199 22 3 1 Conference Calling Configurator udine ape tl ad VERF kx Vn xS OUO RH E E RR gea 200 22 2 2 Gonrerece Calling Edit and Add 2 donstebeint eb RR PET RS EK EHE xU n rei HR pr en REE ERES 201 22 4 Musicon Hold uU Fe 202 22 4 1 Music o Hold Management 1uiiseisasesieci etna h bk tak Gba ER utn hh nk 9 Ra Ra 202 22 9 Distinctive Ring Coniguralon m m 202 22o Fe CADAR OVON mm 203 22 Call Park ng OVGIVIGW usos iade apo a Go petis
133. HINID E HAS Mo du REOS a dU NER REUU tU SERE bU EUR 85 diu Ce CT 93 SIP SIO AP M 95 PUG PROVISION M UU UT 103 doc P Eure DM 107 pisa ee e EE 111 disi EE 113 psp NISHOBEBESBIC cate aieo E E Dundee Phe o ati ten buds ER dut E tu a INR 119 DAE T m TR TRE I UT 123 MONICA mc 125 ld ole ge EUER 145 Picton Gro 5S bi t Sa ico m b e pea uan M PCT e Lu olere Fox EM CUR edd 155 Call Pt C OE kl ta ca datei icto iit endlich unies p EMO Nee Lead ar Verf 159 Outbound Line Group e 163 PUNO PCI SINE iE AEA EO 175 de UM 185 Group EDS e 191 Gall SOM aao eee mT ORO en R bduta UM dpa cA MA ILE NL ac ebd i Due 197 PASE EN E NN T IL T 207 Monitor Log amp Maintenance ccscsvciscvicssccaiscentsavonacandisasepiatentsausncstipedacdstevandactetabuwstasunaaabectsties 217 S O O ais a 219 Statis COPS SIND aaia A t s a e C RR Ra RR Cd 223 DUO Bot a hath cl e abate d Aeon E aso Her aban elated cid tUi id 229 Gall Detail Record CDR e 239 SEEDS MEET Temm 245 Ba La i qe I M 249 cd d5ia ila A 253 X6004 User s Guide 9 Contents Overview ir idein M 259 Web Porland Llc ERR 263 VICE POT Los cdita t eoo en i UO ad UP DR GR RADO o br t deos nU aaa d c Porc Cd 265 Interacuve V
134. Hn 248 Table 118 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Information Collect sssssss 250 Table 119 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Packet Capture sess 251 Table 120 Maintenance gt Backup amp Restore 12seseeseesomtkro ei iaa ERR FOI ERSSEERERd XH ARR ERI E FrRP eri Re M AM REIS 254 Table 121 Maintenance Firmware Upgrade uides arreter bid enden abd lk rr e ht odd i nad 255 Table 122 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients sssssssee em 257 Table 123 Maintenance gt License Control gt Registration s eeiseeeeeciieee eene 260 X6004 User s Guide List of Tables Table 124 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service ssssssssssssseeneeeene nnne 261 Table 125 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service eesessssssssssseeeeenne nennen 262 WADE T26 PES gr C rS 267 Tape 127 Foward Biochemie tative au e eren enl rt hU Ra DR cR CR e ada 268 Table 128 Forward Block DND White List rii e Rm a cta aee exa Pea EE ARREA 270 Tate 129 Forward Block s Find ME LESE iixicieisiia cic risreriecockitbes ei aee xU I SE FEE S CERo teens EADE 270 Table 190 Foward Block Black LIST ucini tkanka Cia iE Elend ERR RR GO ERR RARE DEF Rea iinan tale 271 Table 131 Voice Mal aiceusipdeicubeteie p cia iu ain nad ruber inei renda intimi cnr M EB RUE 272 Tape 122 Web PHONE 11 aioiiiice p ed b ie abeo e ba b o t
135. IDE s IP IT e NULLI OF AI OG i LE GOS nF IER OE Disable All Logs amp Enable Normal Logs Enable All Logs B Enable Alert Log eU eU ee ee ES Qo eo D EI Hane Oe E o p Oe X6004 User s Guide Chapter 26 System Log Each field is described in the following table Table 108 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Internal Log LABEL DESCRIPTION E mail Server 1 2 You can configure a single e mail address or two e mail addresses for sending your logs to Active Select this to activate sending logs to this E Mail server Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e mail addresses specified below If this field is left blank logs and alert messages will not be sent via e mail Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e mail message that the X6004 sends Send From Enter the e mail address that you want to be in the from sender line of the log e mail message that the X6004 sends If you activate SMTP authentication the e mail address must be able to be authenticated by the mail server as well Send Log To Logs are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank logs will not be sent via e mail Send Alerts To Alerts are sent to the e mail address specified in this field If this field is left blank alerts will not be sent via e mail Log Schedule
136. ION Received E mail Specify the e mail address you want to forward your voice message notifications Address to If you select the Attached Voice File option then complete voice messages are sent to this e mail address Attached Voice Select this feature if you want complete voice messages to be sent to the e mail File address you specified in the Received E mail Address field Delete Voice Mail Check this box to delete voicemail messages stored on the X6004 after they have After Mailed been e mailed Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Reset Click this to begin configuring the fields again 32 6 Web Phone Use this screen to make calls from the web phone To access this screen click the Web Phone tab in the web portal Figure 231 Web Phone ZzyxEL VK gt e wa Peer Info Forward Block Voice Mail Web Phone 1001 Phone Book Connected 7r i001 ia UserOne faxing 1001 5553322 23222233233 C S 2 1 29 3 4115316 7348319 lol T Mute Each field is described in the following table Table 132 Web Phone LABEL DESCRIPTION Phone Book Click the Phone Book tab on the right side of the Web Phone screen to display or hide the phone book feature The phone bock feature allows you to search all entries configured in your personal phone book or system phone book configured on the X6004 Search In the left drop down list box select the search criteria The search
137. In this first example all the devices reside on the same subnet A single subnet configuration is recommended for ease of use and management This however is not always possible in your network X6004 User s Guide 211 Chapter 23 ZyStack The following example shows an example where your IP phones are located in different subnets on your network The X6004s are still on the same subnet Subnet 1 IP phones in Subnet 2 and Subnet 3 are both SIP clients of X6004 A In this example Subnet 3 has been configured as a local subnet When a X6004 A receives a call from a phone on Subnet 3 that is directed to a SIP client of X6004 B it is then able to redirect the call directly to X6004 B Subnet 2 however has not been configured as a local subnet Calls that originate from Subnet 2 must go through X6004 A and B in order to reach SIP clients connected to B Figure 193 Internal Call Routing ee ee gee ee ee ee ee Be Be Be Be Be eB Be Be Be Be Be ee ee ee ee eee Ka 4 192 168 1 1 Subnet 1 192 168 1 0 24 lS 192 168 1 102 1 4 n ppc crc ee CO Subnet 2 Subnet 3 72 10 10 0 24 F e 10 1 1 0 24 d 5s am 0000 0 TS I E d 172 10 10 1 1 1 l Io 10444 NN l N P s eee ee ee Be ee ee 23 4 ZyStack Intranet Setup Use this screen to manage local subnets from which IP phones connect to the X6004s in the ZyStack Click Configuration gt ZyStack gt Intranet to view the following screen Figure 194
138. LCR Least Cost Routing on the X6004 20 1 LCR Overview LCRs are made up of two components The first part of an LCR is a set of 1 or more outbound line groups see Chapter 18 on page 163 The second part of an LCR is a dial condition or a pattern of digits that distinguish each individual LCR LCRs are used to give calling rights to authority groups trusted SIP peers as well as outbound line groups This is done via group management see Chapter 21 on page 191 Once you create an LCR you can associate it with Authority Groups give all the extensions contained in an authority group the right to use the outbound line groups configured in the LCR Trusted SIP Peers give the telephones connected to the SIP peer the right to call the X6004 and then dial out from the X6004 using the outbound line groups configured in the LCR Outbound Line Groups give anyone calling in via the associated outbound line group the right to use the X6004 to make calls via the outbound line groups configured in the LCR The following figure shows an example of two LCRs LCR1 is composed of outbound line groups PSTN and TrustedPeer along with the dial condition 01 the period is part of the dial condition LCR2 is composed of outbound line group ITSP along with the dial condition 02 When a user calls 021234 the call is routed through the outbound line group defined in LCR2 Figure 166 LCR Components Example LCR1 PSTN Dial Cond
139. License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but not limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types X6004 User s Guide 307 Appendix B Open Software Announcements Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity auth
140. Line Group FXO Trunk Badd Advanced B E3 GWoelete Q Auto Attendant Description IPPBX_001 PSTN1 SIP Trunk SS EEUU UT Rm Trusted Peer as Ls ECT NENNEN X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 The following screen displays Select the FXO interfaces that you want to add to this outbound line group and click the Right icon to move them to the Used Interface column Click Apply when you are done Figure 28 FXO Connection Configuration FXO Interface Setting a a as Slot B Port 1 sotan CSD Port Port 4 lt Slot B Port 2 Apply Cancel Slot B Port 3 5 The Outbound Line Group screen displays again Click the Auto Attendant icon Auto Attendant routes incoming calls see Chapter 19 on page 175 for details Figure 29 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group Outbound Line Group FXO Trunk SWuto Attendant Gadd AP Advanced Bf Edit fi Del aS SS eme DT Meng IPPBX 001 PSTN1 SIP Trunk Trusted Peer eS oS a Ren nn 6 Make sure the Default AA option is selected FAX is used to forward calls to a single extension such as your FAX machine s extension and click Apply Figure 30 Confirm AA Setting Auto Attendant Setting Auto Attendant Apply 44 Defaut AA 7 Apply Cancel 7 People from the outside world can now call the X6004 using the PSTN numbers provided by yo
141. List Use this screen to edit the Find Me List for your extension This is a list of extensions that the X6004 tries to call if you do not pick up a call To access this screen click the Find Me List button in the Forward Block screen Figure 228 Forward Block gt Find Me List ZyxEL G6 Ka c9 Qu Peer Info Forward Block Voice Mail Web Phone Find Me List Number Add o o Ww Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 129 Forward Block gt Find Me List LABEL DESCRIPTION Number Enter the telephone extension you want the X6004 to forward calls to when you do not pick up a call Click Add and the number you entered displays in the field below Priority Highlight an existing Find Me List extension and use the up arrow to move it up in the list or use the down arrow to move it down in the list The X6004 will try to forward the call to the extensions in the list in the order they appear from top to bottom If the topmost extension in the list does not pick up it tries the one below and so on Delete Highlight an existing Find Me List extension and click the Delete icon to remove it from the list Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to return to Forward Block screen 270 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 32 Web Portal 32 4 3 Blacklist Use this screen to edit the Black List for your extension This
142. N your local traditional telephone service provider or a traditional PBX in your organization In order to create an FXO trunk you must already have an FXO interface card installed on the X6004 See the Quick Start Guide for information on installing your FXO interface card X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group 18 3 1 Add Edit FXO Trunk The screens for editing or adding FXO trunks on the X6004 contain the same fields Only the screen used to add FXO trunks is shown below Click the Add or Edit icon in the FXO Trunk section of the Outbound Line Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown Figure 143 Add Edit FXO Interface Outbound Line Group FXO Interface Machine ID IPPBX 001 z Group Name Description Apply Back to Outbound Group Each field is described in the following table Table 63 Add Edit FXO Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID you have not configured ZyStack Select the ID of the X6004 on which you want to configure the FXO interface This is an internal name not configurable of the X6004 Only one choice is shown if This field is not available when editing an FXO configuration Group Name spaces are not allowed Type the name of this FXO interface You can use alpha numeric characters and Description Type the description for this FXO interface You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are allowed Apply Click Apply to s
143. N interfaces on the X6004 ZyStack This field displays Master if the X6004 is the master for all of the X6004s in a ZyStack This field also displays Master if this X6004 is set up as a stand alone IP PBX Slave if this X6004 is a slave in a ZyStack Status This field displays On If the X6004 is powered on Off If this X6004 is not receiving power Backup By Displays the IP address of the X6004 that serves as the backup IPPBX for this X6004 only applicable in a ZyStack configuration F W Version This field displays the firmware version currently installed on the X6004 Hardware Information This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured then this screen displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack CPU MIPS This field displays the speed of the processing chip on the X6004 in MIPS Millions of Instructions Per Second Memory MB This field displays the total RAM memory available on the X6004 This is the memory available for processing functions on the X6004 File System This field displays the total memory available for the files system on the X6004 The file system stores information such as configuration settings CDR and voicemail This number is the sum of the built in flash memory and the optional hard disk if installed Trunk port These fields display the number of FXO ports ports leading to the PSTN and the number of FXS ports ports leading to analog phones on you
144. NE ls aeter 229 Table 104 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View LOG tester rrt tin E ERrd asia b kan denar EFE dS tr eR TIS HRERREER 230 Table 105 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log Show Filter 231 Table 106 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting aeeeeeeeseeeeeeen eene ntn hrs 232 Table 107 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Active Log Summary ss 233 Table 108 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Internal Log seesesssss 235 Table 109 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Remote Log sss 237 Table 110 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt Management uus eerie ettet bd dde cha d duet dtd 240 Table 111 Bepor LOGS gt CDR gt BACKUP LIST nni ices tr pre REIP EVE RR Rh p ka Ya LN pn en ua Ln ER ere aa p Ln 241 Table 112 Repol gt LOGS gt COR GDR DUI ocenami uann 242 Table 113 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt CDR Query gt Report iuusssscioscci ner re n keai sssi kt e 244 Table 114 Maintenance gt Administrator Username Password sse 246 Table 115 Maintenance gt Administrator LIST iuiiascisusieccseezedacc endete adit tbt dde he tdi sonini 246 Table 116 Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Add eeeeeeeeeieeeeeeeeeeeennee eee thnnnnn 247 Table 117 Maintenance Administrator List Editi teen erri be Ein RRER HERR FEFE rt deter te ER HR
145. P nor may PHP appear in their name without prior written permission from group php net You may indicate that your software works in conjunction with PHP by saying Foo for PHP instead of calling it PHP Foo or phpfoo 5 The PHP Group may publish revised and or new versions of the license from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number Once covered code has been published under a particular version of the license you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such covered code under the terms of any subsequent version of the license published by the PHP Group No one other than the PHP Group has the right to modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this License 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes PHP freely available from lt http www php net gt THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS X6004 User s Guide 311
146. P address of the auto provisioning server The auto discovery process is limited to your LAN Once a ZyXEL VoIP devices finds the X6004 it sends an HTTP request for a configuration file The X6004 checks to see if it has a configuration file associated with the serial number or MAC address of the ZyXEL device requesting the configuration file If the X6004 has the configuration file then it sends the configuration file to the ZyXEL VoIP device 8 2 Auto Provision Screen If an auto provision file has been configured for a SIP extension this screen displays the mapping between a SIP extension and a ZyXEL VoIP device s MAC address or serial number To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision Figure 89 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision Auto Provision Configuration amp Edit dP advanced 1001 No g ar 1002 No g ew 1003 No E4 EY 1004 No g e 1005 Mo g ar 1006 No g e 1007 Mo g ew 1008 No E de i009 No g ar 1010 No g ar X6004 User s Guide Chapter 8 Auto Provision Each field is described in the following table Table 24 Configu ration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Phone Numbers This field displays the extension number configured on the X6004 MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of the ZyXEL device specified to
147. PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED AMOUNT YOU PURCHASE THE PRODUCT BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 10 Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you
148. Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances Itis not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right clai
149. R When users dial into their personal IVR they are prompted to enter their PIN The IVR PIN is assigned to each extension when the extension is created See Section 14 3 3 on page 134 for information on how to configure the IVR PIN for SIP extensions and Section 14 3 11 on page 142 for analog phone extensions If a user authenticates successfully then he or she is guided through the personal IVR menus via a pre recorded audio prompts If a user fails to authenticate the X6004 plays a message indicating that a wrong password was entered and the call is dropped X6004 User s Guide 275 Chapter 33 Interactive Voice Response IVR System 33 3 Personal IVR Main Flow The following figure describes the main flow in the personal IVR system Figure 232 Personal IVR Flow Enter Password amp Blacklist 33 4 Personal IVR PIN Menu The following figure describes the PIN Menu From IVR Main press number 1 on your phone keypad to enter the PIN Menu This menu allows you to change the PIN used to authenticate with your voicemail system web phone and personal IVR Modify PIN Figure 233 IVR PIN Menu Los 276 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 33 Interactive Voice Response IVR System 33 5 Personal IVR Call Forward amp Blacklist The following figure describes the Call Forward amp Blacklist Menu From IVR Main press number 2 on your phone keypad to enter the Call Forward amp Blacklist Menu This menu allows you to
150. S EA 42 SL Goes Me PHONES aaie miki Sra t RE AaS ERR be CIN GEEA E RR EE buc eaa va c EP E LORS AME 45 3 13 Register IP PRONES Re ii ai 45 X6004 User s Guide LE Table of Contents cM aigu cH ete 46 vue KEERDO STUDIES uu ioiei o polt Gp atia na HU EE Alio eta tess KEVELUER CE a da E SR PLE EPA D i 49 32 1 Connecting to PSTN ge a 49 epa i lads m 52 3 2 3 LCR to Authority escccisnp n Mee m 54 ao Making ITSP Calg e 55 PERRE ree SSP PTT 55 aco Dang RMS tor I decr a 59 3 3 3 LOR To Authority Group ASSIGHITBI 11r perro t arr e Morea oss dawn pr eus 61 carri SEE NI o0 RN S D S 62 34 1 C stomizng Feature COOSS Rem 62 3 4 2 Using the Voicemail FOaUrS 22s po ete Yu PoLFIS E LO nn ELE Re POLES PROLES pK 63 Chapter 4 PRE User TON al Linie eiiis ux SIM RAnELUA a apUI MIU Mad dea CERA GERNE Cad Li CORE Mud aa MUI Aaa 65 23 9H POUR VP GO POR atuaatiscueirbedu tint edaedistado beta eum aai eu toba ees ta iE eive beiitr b brbunA 65 ATT our i us m m TT 65 4 1 2 Accessing Tho Web Porial 15i cotra n pius ined tiie dashed statin inha Rass ni EENEN AERAN EENAA AN 65 4 13 Changing Your Security InfOrrrialiolhi issues csse erre iain 66 21 4 Personalizing Your Sets 1 usta deiude rtp ER DU et o Fn ied eb nd t ond 67 SE h Blea e c r EE 70 4 1 6 Using the Web Phone IP Phone Users Only ceeeeeeeeeei sesenta 70 Part Il Web Configurator amp
151. SCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path X6004 User s Guide 257 Chapter 30 System File Maintenance X6004 User s Guide myZyXEL com This chapter shows you how to register your X6004 and subscribe to services available at myZyXEL com 31 1 myZyXEL com Overview BS BS myZyXEL com is ZyXEL s online services center where you can register your X6004 and manage subscription services available for the X6004 You need to create an account before you can register your device and activate the services at myZyXEL com You can directly create a myZyXEL com account register your X6004 and activate a service using the REGISTRATION screen Alternatively go to http www myZyXEL com with the X6004 s serial number and WAN MAC address to register it Refer to the web site s on line help for details To activate a service on a X6004 you need to access myZyXEL com via the X6004 31 1 1 Subscription Services Available on the X6004 At the time of writing the following services are available on the X6004 ZyXEL softphone ZyXEL offers a software based SIP IP phone that you can install on the following operating system computers Microsoft Windows 2000 and Microsoft Windows XP Aft
152. Software without specific written prior permission Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation Copyright 1999 2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation Redwood City California USA AII Rights Reserved Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted LES This Product includes apache 2 0 45 software developed by the Apache Software Foundation under Apache License Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this
153. System Log 26 3 1 Active Log Summary The Active Log Summary screen allows you to view and edit the categories the X6004 logs in the internal and external log servers Click the Active Log Summary button in the Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting screen to view the screen as shown next Figure 205 Report LOGS System Log Log Setting Active Log Summary Active Log Summary All Logs G9 Disable All Logs Enable Normal a Enable All Lays B Enable Alert Log e 300 oO y oO D O0 ty o ty DEM 71 97070 0 m Aim oF oO 716 O tx oltra oO oO 0 ES IPPBX 7 216 o 02nnBE Xa kedo ial gt User gt gt D myzyXEL com E A n gmj o J RRHAROe A E D Oe EHENIESS so ERE UG Goo Soc Goo Default gt Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 107 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Active Log Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Log Enter the telephone number you want to block from calling you when you enable Category call blocking Click Add and the number you entered displays in the field below Log Category This column displays the source of log events that you can record on the X6004 The categories are All Logs all logs generated on the X6004 IPPBX all activities related to the PBX functions of the X6004 For example a an FXS card failure User
154. This is a list of extensions that the X6004 tries to call if you do not pick up a call To access this screen click the Find Me List button in the Call Forward screen Figure 112 Find Me List Find Me List Number Add o 9 t Apply Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Each field is described in the following table Table 45 Find Me List LABEL DESCRIPTION Number Enter the telephone extension you want the X6004 to forward calls to when you do not pick up a call Click Add and the number you entered displays in the field below The Priority Highlight an existing Find Me List extension and use the up arrow to move it up in the list or use the down arrow to move it down in the list The X6004 will try to forward the call to the extensions in the list in the order they appear from top to bottom If the top extension does not pick up it tries the one below and so on The X6004 attempts to forward calls to the top highest priority five phone numbers only Delete Highlight an existing Find Me List extension and click the Delete icon to remove it from the list Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to return to the Call Forward screen 14 3 7 Blacklist Use this screen to edit the Black List for your extension This is a list of phone numbers from which the X6004 will not forward calls to your extension To access this
155. UTIES DO T TS 197 Table 63 Emergency Call ConfiguraliOll xcccsiccsecvvceseniscvenncasirevanndndustaanceducs vesnneduretsananduytaandedutvaancaduevinas 198 Table 64 Conero e ROOM LEL uiscedxecdasesdteztc eid epa od cda odd e i e a t odd Du RR Re Loa 200 Table 35 Conierom e Room Add T nee an NNR aana 201 Table 66 Music on Hold File Guidelines 1 2 iier t inicia tomi rt nnne dato a dto rd adn eta 202 TOEO i e Mns n tS 202 jr DERI II iiie ET 203 TODOS Anta EAN ceca se as thet e imd vci D seems E pea o d p e tein ee 203 Table 90 Call Parking Progression ica eruadas en pede Pp dedu pua ER Ee pede e pads Pb Cio add addidi 204 Table 91 Call Parking COnIGQUPAUON 205 TAS Oe ZY ak a DON aeaa 209 TAS ZV e Er 210 Ele A cs dz em E 210 Table 99 re 4 rns E T PT 212 Table UB ZYSK Add DANEI 25 ca He Tet bate sar buda Presb EEE 213 VANS O7 Z otak SAGE m 214 Table 98 Monitor gt System TRIOCEDISDOTE ca vercisd consensual obacanssdensuautaa stances Eh dd dai Falk ke hae b eR od 219 Table 99 Monitor Status Observation gt SIP Peer iioi ceinture teet dd nd dd und dd 224 Table 100 Monitor gt Status Observation gt FXS Peer 4 eeseeciee nnne tnra dta a d tn haha da as 225 Table 101 Monitor Status Observalion c FAO TRUK wesssinscacisresasensedenpadaaasceppanuesiteepecteaiarprandesititeas 226 Table 102 Monitor gt Status Observation gt SIP TEBDK i cies cece esee sortiert tnter dte eta dme hti dotata 227 jr UMA
156. When you create links from an outbound line group to an LCR you allow incoming calls from that outbound line group to make outbound calls via the outbound line groups configured in the LCR For example someone calling from outside your organization can use the X6004 to forward their call to another outside line In the following example outbound line group TrustedPeer is associated with LCRI LCRI is comprised of two outbound line groups a SIP trunk to your VoIP service provider ITSP and a connection to your local traditional telephone company PSTN Calls coming in via the TrustedPeer connection can use the ITSP and PSTN connections to complete their calls Figure 175 Group Management Outbound Line Group to LCR Intamet TrustedPeer ll ITS Ring Groups When you create links from an outbound line group to a ring group you allow calls coming in via that outbound line group to call the page or hunt group configured within the ring group In the following example outbound line group Sales is associated to Ring Group A Ring Group A consists of Page Group 1 allows you to call all the extensions within Page Group 1 simply by dialing the page group number 888 Hunt Group 1 allows you to call extensions within Hunt Group 1 based on the algorithm defined in the hunt group setup simply by dialing the hunt group number 999 All calls coming in via the outbound line group ITSP can call Page Group 1 or Hunt Gr
157. X6004 IP PBX User s Guide Version 1 9 2007 Edition 1 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the X6004 using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your hardware connections Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Command Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the X6004 Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all documentation related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw X6004 User s Guide 3 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how war
158. X6004 to play the default music file Click Configuration gt PBX gt Call Settings gt Music on Hold to view the following screen Figure 182 Music on Hold Music on Hold Upload new music file Browse Upload Use Default Playback The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Music on Hold LABEL DESCRIPTION Music on Hold Management Upload new Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to music file find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process Use Default Click this to select the default music file to be played when callers are placed on hold Playback Click Playback to play the uploaded audio file The file is played by the default media player installed on your computer 22 5 Distinctive Ring Configuration The X6004 allows you to select different ring tones based on the origins of calls routed through the X6004 Click Configuration gt PBX gt Call Settings gt Distinctive Ring to configure the distinctive ring feature X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services Figure 183 Distinctive Ring Distinctive Ring Distinctive Ring active Calling Type Internal Call SIP Trunk FXO Ring Tone 1 7 Playback
159. XO port on the X6004 FXS This field displays the total DSP channels assigned to the FXS ports on the X6004 The X6004 automatically assigns one DSP channel per FXS port on the X6004 SIP trunk This field displays the total DSP channels assigned to the SIP trunks connections to external SIP servers for example your ITSP on the X6004 The X6004 automatically assigns two DSP channels per SIP trunk on the X6004 Conference Specify the DSP channels you want to assign specifically for conference calls on the X6004 Share This field displays the unassigned DSP channels on the X6004 Unassigned DSP channels are shared between SIP phone clients and conference calls on the X6004 Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide 121 Chapter 12 DSP Management 122 X6004 User s Guide Office Hours This chapter shows you how to set the office hours for the X6004 13 1 Office Hours Overview The office hours you specify on the X6004 are used by the auto attendant feature to determine how the X6004 handles incoming calls For example when calls come into your organization during office hours you may want to allow them to enter any extension they wish to call However when calls come into your organization after office hours you may want to direct them all to a single extension f
160. a at th hannah he 244 Figure 212 Maintenance gt Administrator Username Password see 245 Figure 213 Maintenance gt Administrator LIST 1i esee ves ier yon E Fed e pared ex Eae YA E Roa ad EUH de 246 Figure 214 Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Add 1e ses eese ni Eerpa aun ai E enitn eet eene ane eR Hpe aA REB et 247 Figure 215 Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Edit 1 iusscceisen etre rttr traten ento ha eai tata na 248 Figure 216 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Information Collect 250 Figure 217 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Packet Capture 00 eee 251 Figure 218 Maintenance gt Backup amp Restore uiii sonet eec ssn indana Dao es M dd ded pad 254 Figure 219 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade ccccccessecsceeseseeeceeenseneeeeeeseeseesenensnaseeuanseneneceatenees 255 Figure 220 Maintenance gt License Control gt Registration ener nnne 260 Figure 221 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service eese nnne nne nnnne nnn nnne nnns 261 Figure 222 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service iiuei essa eene retenus ierra nne E Epra a eee n PrMa aereo Ea de nE E EpuS 262 Figure 223 Web Portal CVGinwew 265 Figaro 224 WED Portal LOG uostnetunieisateh ise bita pui aont Lp ced Lene redet Gu dE stad 266 Figulo 225 IE Ios a aa escis motus te
161. ack configured then this screen displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack File System These fields display the current utilization of the available memory on the X6004 They are divided into the following categories Flash This field displays the percentage of the total built in memory currently being used up on the X6004 HDD This field displays the percentage of your hard disk memory if a hard disk is installed currently used up on the X6004 Extension These fields display the utilization percentage of your available SIP extensions and FXS extension An extension is considered to be utilized as soon as it is created The number of SIP extensions you are allowed to create on the X6004 is limited by the subscription service on the X6004 The number of FXS extensions you are allowed to create on the X6004 is limited by the number of FXS ports you have installed on the X6004 The FXS ports are used to connect analog phones to the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 24 System Information 222 X6004 User s Guide Status Observation This chapter shows you how to view detail status information about SIP and FXS extensions as well as the FXO and SIP trunks configured on the X6004 25 1 SIP Peer Status Use the SIP Peer screen to view status information about the SIP extensions configured on the X6004 Click Monitor gt Status Observation gt SIP Peer in the web configurato
162. ack to the X6004 via the web configurator 11 2 Phonebook Configuration Screen Use this screen to set up a connection to an LDAP server on the X6004 and to either import or export your local phonebook To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook Figure 94 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook LDAP Phonebook Configure LDAP Enable ri LDAP Server ID LDAP Port RootDN GERENS Password n EZZSs BaseDN E Local Phonebook Export Import Export phonebook file Export Import phonebook file Browse Import Each field is described in the following table Table 28 Configuration PBX Server Configuration Phonebook LABEL DESCRIPTION LDAP Phonebook Use this section to configure your connection settings to the LDAP database Configure containing the phonebook entries you want to import to the X6004 LDAP Enable Check this box to enable LDAP based phonebook on the X6004 LDAP Server Specify the IP address of the server containing the LDAP database LDAP Port Specify the port the LDAP server uses for sending the phonebook to the X6004 RootDN Specify the login name of the LDAP server Password Specify the password for the LDAP server BaseDN Enter the string identifying the location on the LDAP server where the information you need for your phonebook is stored Apply Click this to import the
163. ails about SIP extensions with which no SIP device is currently registered offline e Call Status select whether you want to view status details about extensions that are currently busy or idle Click Query to update the status detail table in the SIP Peer section of the screen Refresh interval Enter how often seconds you want the X6004 to update this screen Click Apply to update the screen immediately If you do not want this screen to update periodically enter 0 SIP Peer This section displays the status detail table Machine ID This field displays the auto configured name of the X6004 Group Name This field displays the authority group name to which an extension belongs User Name This field displays the user name associated with a SIP extension Extension This field displays the SIP extension number For each SIP extension there is also Number a web phone extension listed in the following format web extension number For example extension 1001 also has a web phone extension web1001 listed in this table The web phone extensions allow you to see whether a web phone is being used for a specific SIP extension Registration This field displays online if an IP phone is registered with the X6004 It displays Status offline if no IP phone is registered with the X6004 for a specific extension For the web phone feature it displays online if a user has logged in the web phone feature
164. alaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Sales E mail sales zyxel com Telephone 1 800 255 4101 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www us zyxel com FTP ftp us zyxel com X6004 User s Guide 323 Appendix D Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Te
165. ame of the currently logged in administrator account You can use up to 25 alphanumeric characters Spaces are not allowed and the first character must be a letter Password Type a new password for the currently logged in administrator account You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters and spaces are not allowed Confirm Retype the new password for the currently logged in administrator account Password Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to begin configuring the fields again 28 3 Administrator List Screen Use this screen to manage administrator accounts on the X6004 To access this screen click Maintenance gt Administrator List Figure 213 Maintenance gt Administrator List Administrator list Administrator list Delete add B edit Tl Delette Debug admin Full admin Debug admin Debug admin Debug admin Each field is described in the following table Table 115 Maintenance gt Administrator List LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator List Delete Check the Delete box and click Delete to remove this account from the X6004 Username This field displays the username of an administrator account on the X6004 Description This field displays the description of an administrator account on the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 115 Maintenance Administrator List LABEL
166. ames Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License This Product includes ppp 2 4 4 software under the PPP License X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements PPP License Copyright c 1993 The Australian National University All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the Australian National University The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Cop
167. anagement gt Ring Group sse 151 Foue T Add RTO NO m 151 Figure 130 Ring Group for riii e 151 Figure 131 reciclado 152 Figure T32 Ring Group Tor Marron ceserkarrernnsikin ikin e RP DON R ete 152 Figure 133 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management ocior eerte et dad d evene d 153 Figure 134 Page Group to Authority Group Assignment ssssssseeeeeeeemnn 153 Figure 135 Pickup Gtoup OVES m 155 Figure 136 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group eeee 156 Figure 137 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group Add Edit 156 Figure 138 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access ssseeseee 159 Figure 139 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code Edit Add 160 Figure 140 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code gt Internal Extension LONO P 160 Figure MT Ouiba gd Line VIVE Lu etie d RENE SEED pU bU pdacbulvt ets Epp catbulet ena buludeqaq Eu qd HE 163 Figure 142 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Group 164 Figure 143 seeds seliiL Mm 165 Figure 144 Configure an FXO Interface auscee ed ciere c Ub Pert E bre rpe Elbe e NN Rp RnR ed clin dope EUR PHI RUN 165 F
168. and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING
169. apter 26 System Log Table 107 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Active Log Summary LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the Log Setting screen without saving your changes 26 3 2 System Log Configuration To change your X6004 s log settings click the edit icon of the System Log entry in the Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting screen The screen appears as shown Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the X6004 is to send logs the schedule for when the X6004 is to send logs and which logs and or immediate alerts the X6004 is to send Figure 206 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Internal Log E mail Server 1 Active Mail Server Mail Subject Send From Send Log to Send Alerts to Sending Log Day for Sending Log Time for Sending Log SMTP Authentication User Name Password E mail Server 2 Active Log and Alert IPPBX User Default Log Consolidation Active All Logs myZyXEL com l Outgoing SMTP Server Name or IP Address ee l E Mail Address E Mail Address E Mail Address when Full Sunday U Z Hour p Minute m m LTD C gt A 9 Od O19 OUO Om mum Eu Log Consolidation Period seconds 10 600 Apply Cancel E NN A SNE NU I Nul NOM SSI Nu NG NUM A GRE NA N o Pa P IL PA c
170. arding end BIOGKIDE iiir ctt tetro loe Ir stet rebates bee rael ae Ip s bk aU EE REA 267 SU TONG VEe DSE arses EEEE ERR 269 Bee Find gB e c 270 TA OUR M em 271 ocAsRUsr A5r fup wm E 271 326 WeB PHONE T 272 Chapter 33 Interactive Voice Response IVR System eese nennen nnn 275 SENI IAS rl NET UU IL T T TI 275 cod ACCON BUR ssucodadsisi ndi ee pcena E ueri Doe a topo E aisi beta ee EMI MM bip eiu un 275 33 3 Parsona IVR Main FION painea aS 276 Boe Persie IWR PIN MERU mt 276 34 3 Personal IVR Call Forward amp Blacklist dcccssacsaseuessceiguuetonndedues castcavtenteseeniuedasetelusteoveabdereants 277 2B Persemal IVR VOISBITIII ios ns io en bac o AE EE bac AEA EA 279 Part VI Appendices amp Index denen iin anion a ennn 281 Chapter 34 Product Specie all lis uae viptivatixini ac vals nc aba Re aa YEAR aa Ela erbaT cru EA 283 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting ccccccccccccccceccceccceeccecceeccecccesececeneeeeeeeeeeeeess 287 Appendix B Open Software Announcements ccccccccccceccceccceececcceecceceeecececeeeeteeseeeeeeess 297 Appendix v Mire rrjs ec 317 Appendix D Customer SUDO bier bna Pe be pEbR ti E b Dict bs ew TERR Kb PV AR DEF DE NIA 321 X6004 User s Guide Table of Contents X6004 User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures zc UPPE ENIE aaa 33 Figure 2 SIP Devices and th XGOO4 usse deus pent
171. ase X6004 User s Guide Chapter 11 Phonebook 11 3 1 Local Phonebook Screen Use this screen to set up the local phonebook settings on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook Figure 97 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt Local Phonebook Local Phonebook Local Phonebook Delete iadd edit WW Delete m name ext home mobile e mail logonname country departmen Delete Each field is described in the following table Table 30 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt Local Phonebook LABEL DESCRIPTION Local Phonebook This screen allows you to view edit and remove local phonebook entries on the X6004 Delete Select the Delete checkbox and click Delete to remove a local phonebook entry from the X6004 name This field displays the name field value of the local phonebook entry ext This field displays the ext field value of the local phonebook entry home This field displays the home field value of the local phonebook entry mobile This field displays the mobile field value of the local phonebook entry e mail This field displays the e mail field value of the local phonebook entry logon name This field displays the logon name field value of the local phonebook entry country This field displays the country field value of the
172. ave your changes Group Cancel Back to Outbound Click this to go to the Outbound Line Group screen without saving your changes 18 3 2 Configure an FXO Trunk Use this screen to configure an FXO Trunk Click the Advanced icon in the FXO Trunk section of the Outbound Line Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown Figure 144 Configure an FXO Interface Outbound Line Group FXO Interface Setting Slot sit e Port Port1 Apply Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group Each field is described in the following table Table 64 Configure an FXO Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Available This column displays the FXO ports available on the X6004 Highlight one of the Interface FXO ports and click the Right icon if you want to add it to this outbound line group Used Interface This column displays the FXO ports currently configured for this outbound line group Highlight one of the FXO ports and click the Left icon if you want to remove it from the outbound line group Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go to the Outbound Line Group screen without saving your changes 18 3 3 Auto Attendant for Incoming Calls Use this screen to select which auto attendant should be used with this outbound line group See Chapter 19 on page 175 for information on configuring auto attendant Click the Auto Attendant
173. base to store CDRs 27 1 1 Local CDR Database The local CDR database has limited capacity and when it is full it empties its contents into a compressed file of the call records This file is referred to as an Aged File An Aged File can be forwarded to an e mail address where it can be reviewed at a later time or it can be deleted from the system Whether you delete or send the full aged file to an administrator the X6004 continues to record telephone call details in an empty CDR database Another way to deal with the limited capacity on the local CDR database of the X6004 1s to actively manage the CDR database This requires you to create backups of the CDR database and send them to an administrator via e mail 27 1 1 1 Viewing Aged Files An Aged File is a compressed file with the extension tgz tgz files can be uncompressed with data compression utilities for example WinRAR or WinZIP The result of decompressing this file are three files which can then be managed via a MySQL Database Management System DBMS The three files are e cdr MYD a MySQL data file edr MYI a MySQL index file edr frm a MySQL format file 27 1 2 CDR Database Management via MySQL MySQL is a database management system based on SQL Structured Query Language You can configure a MySQL server to collect CDRs from the X6004 and expand the capacity of telephone records you can collect and review X6004 User s Guide Chapter 2
174. bound line group and it services incoming calls on those lines If your organization has two outbound line groups each with a specific telephone number for incoming calls then you can assign a different auto attendant for each incoming line Assign one auto attendant for general calls to your organization for example AAT and one auto attendant for example FAX for direct routing to a FAX machine Figure 152 Auto Attendant Welcome Please dial the extension of the person you want to speak with or dial 0 to speak with the operator 555 0002 555 0001 gs 1002 1003 19 2 Auto Attendant Structure The X6004 comes with a default auto attendant The default auto attendant simply prompts callers to enter the extension they wish to reach There is only one time when a caller has to make a decision The following figure shows the default auto attendant structure X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant Figure 153 Auto Attendant Default Structure gt 100153 L 1002 amp s B 1003 QS W 1004 QS Incoming Call 1006 amp s gt 1007 x B 1008 KS m 10090 You can configure a more complex auto attendant structure to fit your organization s needs An auto attendant can contain several more complex menus that can guide an incoming call to a specific extension or a group of extensions In the following example an incoming caller is prompted to specify whether they want to ta
175. c Setting Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want this extension to use when communicating with the X6004 See Section 14 1 1 on page 126 for more information on voice codecs The following codecs shown in highest quality to lowest quality order are supported by the X6004 e G711 a law typically used in Europe e G711 p law typically used in North America and Japan G729 e G723 1 you must activate support for this codec in the Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server screen G726 When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec If these SIP extensions are assigned to videophones you must specify the video codecs used for video calls The X6004 allows the following video codecs to passthrough H 261 H 263 H 264 e MP4 See Section 14 1 2 on page 127 for more information on video codecs Codec Pool This column indicates the codec types not used for these extensions You can add a codec type to be used for these extensions by highlighting it and clicking the Right button Codec List This column indicates the codec types used by these extensions You can organize the priority of the codecs by highlighting it and clicking the Up or Down buttons to move the codec higher or lower in priority The SIP extensions attempt to use the higher priority codecs first and try the lower priority codecs next You can remove a codec type from being used f
176. c extension directly Extension C Enable Disable No audio file Playbac 111 Forward to next menu Next Menu EATI 333 Forward to an extension 4444 EP d 22 Forward to an extension 111 EATI Apply Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant Each field is described in the following table Table 76 Auto Attendant Menu Settings Night Service LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Attendant This field identifies which auto attendant settings you are configuring Night Service Auto Attendant Name Night Service Choose Enable to specify that you want to have separate setting for this auto attendant during the Night Service hours See Chapter 13 on page 123 for more information on office hours Choose Disable to use one set of auto attendant settings only Office Hour settings Audio File Upload Enter the location of the file you want to upload or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want to upload Upload Click this to upload an audio file for this menu of auto attendant Audio File State This field displays Uploaded if an audio file has been uploaded for this menu If no audio file has been uploaded for this menu it displays No audio file Playback Click Playback to play the audio file uploaded for this menu The file is played by the default media player installed on your computer Dial Extension Specify wheth
177. ca and Japan G 729A G 722 G 722 2 G 723 1 you must activate support for this codec in the Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server screen G726 When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec If these SIP extensions are assigned to videophones you must specify the video codecs used for video calls The X6004 allows the following video codecs to passthrough H 261 H 263 H 264 MP4 See Section 14 1 2 on page 127 for more information on video codecs Codec Pool This column indicates the codec types not used by this extension You can add a codec type to be used by this extension by highlighting it and hitting the Right button Codec List This column indicates the codec types used by this extension You can organize the priority of the codecs by highlighting it and clicking the Up or Down buttons to move the codec higher or lower in priority The SIP extension attempts to use the higher priority codecs first and tries the lower priority codecs next You can remove a codec type from being used from this extension by highlighting it and hitting the Left button Extra Setting X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Table 48 SIP Extension Advanced Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION DTMF Mode Control how the X6004 handles the tones that the IP phone using this extension makes when you push its buttons One use of the tones is t
178. cel 3 You can now use the telephones that are part of the Basic authority group to make long distance calls using the ITSP connection The following figure summarizes the outbound call process for this example Figure 52 Outbound Calls via ITSP The X6004 matches this number with the long_distance_call LCR applies the offset strips off the 1 adds the prefix 016 to the start of of the number and routes the call to ITSP The ITSP applies the dialing plan rate a and sends the call to 212555555 Caller dials 1212555555 The X6004 sends the call 016212555555 74 212 555 555 3 4 Using Call Features The X6004 has built in call features for functions such as call forwarding call blocking voicemail and so on These features can be activated or accessed by dialing specific numbers from the phones connected to the X6004 The numbers used to access call features are called call feature codes This section shows you how to customize call features It also describes how to configure a ZyXEL IP phone V300 is used in our example to access voicemail by using the voicemail feature code See Section 7 5 on page 100 for more information on all call features 3 4 1 Customizing Feature Codes Click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Feature Code to display the codes used for the X6004 s call features You can change the codes in this screen Provide
179. cept that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements BS 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written
180. ck feature Queue Size Select a limit to the number of auto callback requests for the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services Table 89 Auto Callback continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 22 7 Call Parking Overview Call parking is similar to placing a call on hold The difference is that you can pick the call up again from another telephone extension in your organization The X6004 allows you to configure an extension for a call parking lot The parking lot places a call in parking slot and informs you of the parking slot number that you can use to reconnect to the parked call You can reconnect to the call from any extension within your organization The following figure shows the progression of call parking Figure 185 Call Parking Overview A ss 555 5555 A step by step progression is the following Table 90 Call Parking Progression CALLER A X6004 CALLER B 1 Caller A makes a call to 2 The X6004 routes the callto 3 Caller B picks up the call caller B caller B at extension 1004 Conversation between caller A and B 4 Caller B transfers the call to the call parking lot This is done by dialing followed by the parking lot number 5 The X6004 parks the call and informs caller B of the number to call to reconnect to the call This
181. clude a successful login of an administrator or a failure to login by an administrator myZyXEL com activities related to services registered via myZyXEL com Some examples include registration of additional SIP extensions or registration of ZyXEL s V100 softphones Default all other activities related to the functions of the X6004 Some examples include failure to reach a DNS server or new IP address received from a DHCP server The X6004 can also be configured to send email alerts to an administrator based on the severity of the event recorded The following table outlines the severity levels of the logs on the X6004 Table 103 Log Severity SEVERITY ALERT LEVEL DESCRIPTION SENT EMERG Emergency logs are created when the X6004 is unusable for YES example a power failure ALERT Alert logs are created when administrative action must be taken YES immediately for example the backup power supply has been activated CRIT Critical logs are created when a critical condition occurs on the YES X6004 for example the system is running low on memory ERR Error logs are created when an error occurs on the X6004 for NO example a login failure by an administrator WARNING Warning logs are created when a warning condition occurs on the NO X6004 for example when the X6004 fails to register an extension NOTICE Notice logs are created when normal but significant events occur NO on the X6004 For example a new administra
182. code allows you to use the outbound dialing rules assigned to your authority group from extensions that do not have the same outbound dialing rules assigned to them For example you belong to authority group A and you can make both local and long distance calls from your extension Your secretary however belongs to authority group B and can only make local calls When you try to make a long distance call from your secretary s extension the X6004 does not allow it and prompts you to enter the access code associated with your authority group After you enter the access code your long distance call goes through Use this screen to manage the access codes for authority groups on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Figure 138 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Call Access Code Delete Gi Add B Edit Delete N ca at RITE POUT POF M EGIN r default 11111111 B Delete Each field is described in the following table Table 59 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the Delete box and click Delete to remove this call access code setting Group This field displays an authority group name that has been set up with an access code Access Code This field displays the access code Add Edit Delete Click one of the following options Add to set up an acce
183. com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz X6004 User s Guide 321 Appendix D Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone
184. coming calls to that extension when your phone is in use Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension X6004 User s Guide Chapter 32 Web Portal Table 127 Forward Block LABEL DESCRIPTION No Answer Select Enable and the X6004 will forward all incoming calls to the extensions you Forward specify when you do not answer the phone within the default ring time The default ring time is configured in the Configuration PBX Server Configuration Global Set screen Click Find Me List to specify a list of extensions that the X6004 will forward incoming calls to See Section 32 4 2 on page 270 Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension After Office Hours These fields specify how to treat calls to your extension that occur after office hours Select Enable and specify an extension The X6004 will forward all incoming calls to that extension Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Call Blocking Use this section to configure call blocking settings for your extension Setting Black List Select Enable and the X6004 will block all incoming calls from extensions that you specify as blacklisted Click the Black List button to configure ph
185. configuration requirement for setting up internal call routing are 1 Create an authority group 2 Create extensions in the authority group 2 3 Outbound Call Routing Outbound call routing refers to calls originating from an extension on the X6004 going via an outbound line group to a telephone outside your organization Outbound call routing requires that an authority group is linked to an outbound line group The link between the two is an LCR Least Cost Routing LCRs contain the dialing rules for outbound line groups Authority groups need to be associated to LCRs to gain access to the outbound line groups In the most basic setup example an organization has one authority group with all of the company s extensions one outbound line group and an LCR which grants the authority group access to outbound lines Everyone in the organization has the same rights to use outbound lines Figure 7 Outbound Call Routing Basic In a more advanced example you can create two authority groups still have one outbound line group and two different LCRs You can now control the types of outbound calls that can be made by each authority group In the figure below the SALES authority group has a local call LCR and a long distance LCR associated to it This allows its group members to make both local and long distance calls via the outbound line group R amp D authority group only has the local LCR associated to it so its group members can only make
186. creen as shown Figure 126 Add Edit Hunt Group Entry Number Description Ring Algorithm Office Hours Night Service Ring All 7 es NM Selected Member 3333 1002 zl 9 3333 1002 zi a Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 56 Add Edit Hunt Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry Number Type the number you have to dial to call the extensions in this hunt group This number can be from 1 to 16 digits long Description Type a description for this hunt group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 15 Ring Group Table 56 Add Edit Hunt Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Ring Algorithm Select the method for the X6004 to decide the ring order of extensions in this hunt group Ring All ring all extensions at the same time until one answers Round Robin take turns ringing each available not engaged extension in the hunt group Start with the first extension top in the Selected Member column in this group Least Recent ring the extension which was least recently called in this group Fewest Calls ring the extension with fewest completed calls in this group Random ring a random extension Round Robing with Memory take turns ringing each available not engaged extension in the hunt group Start with the extension that follows is below in the Selected Member column the extension that last picked up a call in this h
187. creen as shown Figure 191 ZyStack Edit ZyStack Edit ZyStack Edit Machine ID Serial Description WAN IP LAN IP Z Interface Type WAN MAC LAM MAC IPPBX 002 12373 isecondary 172 23 23 234 192 168 1 12 LAN Slave 00A0C5123456 00A0C5123457 Set Cancel Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 ZyStack Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID This field displays the system name of the X6004 The system name is automatically assigned to the X6004 based on when it was added to the ZyStack IPPBX_01 is always the master or a stand alone IPPBX followed by slaves IPPBX_02 IPPBX_03 and so on Serial Type the serial number of the X6004 you want to add to the ZyStack You can get the serial number by clicking on the edit icon in the Configuration gt ZyStack gt Setting screen of an X6004 that is not part of a ZyStack Description Type a description for this ZyStack member X6004 User s Guide Chapter 23 ZyStack Table 94 ZyStack Edit continued LABEL DESCRIPTION WAN IP This field displays the WAN IP address of the X6004 LAN IP This field displays the LAN IP address of the X6004 Z Interface This field displays the interface LAN or WAN which the X6004s use to form the ZyStack This interface is the same for all X6004 in the ZyStack Type This field displays whether the X6004 is a Master or a S
188. d This means that this LCR will be used when callers dial any 7 or greater digit number that begins with a 1 The X stands for any digit 0 to 9 and is used to create a minimum length condition The period is a wildcard indicating that any number can follow the 1XXXXX condition Test the dial condition In our example we tested the number 1212555555 to see if it matches our dial condition You can test any number by typing it in the Number Pattern Test field and clicking the Right icon an O appears if the number typed in matches the dial condition and an X appears if it does not match the dial condition Specify an offset value In our example we configure an offset value of 1 The offset value tells the X6004 how many initial digits if any it should strip off of the dialed number before routing the call to the external line Specify a prefix number In this example our ITSP has a special dial plan for long distance calls A caller must dial 016 in order to take advantage of the dial plan By adding 016 in the Prefix field the X6004 automatically adds 016 to calls that match this dial condition See Figure 52 on page 62 for an example Click Apply to save your settings X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 49 Dial Condition for long distance call LCR LCR List LCR Item Dial Condition Dial Condition LCR Name long distance call Dial Condition fi XXXXX Oo fi 212555555 E Oo Number Pattern Test
189. d this is a name automatically assigned to the X6004 in some management screens the outbound line group is identified in the following format Machine ID Group Name so in our example it is IPPBX_01 ITSP1 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 41 Add SIP Trunk Outbound Line Group SIP Trunk Machine ID IPPBX oot 7 Group Name rsr Description Back to Outbound Group 3 The new outbound line group displays in the following screen Now you will configure the connection to your ITSP Click the outbound line group s Advanced icon Figure 42 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group FXO Trunk Badd AP Advanced BP Edit fil Delete Y Auto Attendant as cc E IPPBX 001 PSTNi AE SO SIP Trunk IPPBX 001 ITSP1 Trusted Peer 4 The following screen displays Fill in the fields with the information provided by your ITSP in our example we use the sample information as shown in Table 3 on page 56 Click Apply when you are done X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 43 SIP Connection Configuration ENXIEXZN 0 ll 0 L w SIP Setting Number SIP Local Port SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domain DTMF Mode Caller ID Authentication User Name Password CODEC Setting CODEC Pool sss 122 5060 fi 27 2337 22 5060 f
190. d Configuration combines all of the files listed above into a single uploadable file This file has a binromromd extension for example 100AVA1b1 binromromd Regardless of which file you want to upload to the X6004 you must first rename it to the internal firmware file name on the X6004 ZLD current 30 3 1 1 Example FTP Commands Do the following to upload the firmware and configuration file to the X6004 1 Rename the file you want to upload to ZLD current and place it in the directory from which you launch your FTP session In our example this is the root directory C 2 Launch the FTP client on your computer For example from the command prompt type ftp followed by a space and the IP address of your X6004 Type your username and press ENTER when prompted the default is admin Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary ou Co Use put to transfer files from the computer to the X6004 for example put ZLD current transfers the firmware and configuration that your renamed to ZLD current to the X6004 7 The X6004 uploads the file and automatically reboots The FTP session with the X6004 is automatically terminated X6004 User s Guide Chapter 30 System File Maintenance This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the ZLD current file to the X6004 172 23 37 201 Password ftp bin 226 done C NV ftp 172
191. d to configure the Prefix and Postfix values as long as the SIP password length is at least four digits long Click Apply and wait for the X6004 to create the ten extensions Figure 15 Add Multiple SIP Extensions Add SIP Peers Group Amount DTMF Mode CODEC Setting Authority Group Start Number Step Interval SIP Auth Password Basic foo R Prefix t1 Postfix 99 info CODEC Pool ga Peel Cancel 6 The SIP extensions display as shown here Figure 16 Authority Group Configuration Authority Group Peer List Group Name Basic Description Add SIP Peers Delete Badd edit b Delete PE 39 1 T 1001 SIP 1001 g n 1002 SIP 1002 B ti ri 1003 SIP 1003 EP d m 1004 SIP 1004 g wt r 1005 SIP 1005 g r 1006 SIP 1006 amp n 1007 SIP 1007 BP d E 1008 SIP 1008 amp m 1009 SIP 1009 amp O 1010 SIP 1010 amp Delete 7 Keep alist of the SIP passwords the Prefix Extension Number Postfix combinations in this example When you deploy the network s IP phones you will need this information for SIP registration See Section 3 1 2 on page 45 for information on configuring your IP phones X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials The extension number serves as the password the user uses to log into the X6004 to configure his extension s call forwarding call blocking phonebook voice mail and other settings See Chapter 32
192. ddress book entries from an LDAP directory The X6004 is capable of sending LDAP queries to an LDAP server to create and keep up to date the phone book entries on the X6004 You need the following information about the LDAP server on your network to issue an LDAP query from the X6004 LDAP Server IP address this is the IP address of the LDAP server you want to query Port number this is the port number that the LDAP user to receive LDAP queries RootDN this is the username used to authenticate with the LDAP server This information is configured on the LDAP server Refer to your LDAP server documentation Password this is the password used to authenticate with the LDAP server BaseDN this string identifies the location on the LDAP server where the phone book information is stored LDAP directories are divided into subdirectories and you need to enter the right subdirectory in order to search for the information for your phonebook The names ofthe fields on the LDAP database that you want to obtain information from Each record on the LDAP database contains many fields and you need to provide the correct field names in order to obtain the data X6004 User s Guide 113 Chapter 11 Phonebook 11 1 2 Local Phonebook The local phonebook on the X6004 can be created by adding phonebook entries via the web configurator You can also export the local phonebook into a text file The text file can be edited and imported b
193. de Legal Information Copyright Copyright O 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may
194. e X6004 Click the Delete icon to remove an existing conference room from the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services 22 3 2 Conference Calling Edit and Add Use this screen to configure a new conference room Click the Add icon to see the screen as shown BES The screen for editing an existing conference room has the same fields as the screen shown below You can access the Conference Room Edit screen by clicking the Edit icon in the Conference Room List screen Figure 181 Conference Room Add Conference Room Add Conference Room Add Max Members PIN Number Description Conference Number 4 to 7 digits Machine ID IPPBX_001 Confirm PIN Number Empty is no authentication oo Ada Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Conference Room Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Conference Enter the extension 4 to 7 digits in length callers should dial to enter this Number conference room If you are editing an existing conference room entry this field is read only Machine ID Select the X6004 you want to use for this conference call If you are editing an existing conference room entry this field is read only Max Members Specify the maximum number of participants for this conference room The minimum number of participants for a conference call is three and the maximum number you can configure is 99 Once the maximu
195. e 119 FXS Extension Voice Mail Voice Mail Voice Mail Setting Received E mail Address l Attached Voice File Delete Voice Message After Mailed Apply Back to Peer List The fields in this screen are the same as the fields for SIP extension voice mail screen Refer to Table 47 on page 139 for detailed field descriptions 14 3 14 FXS Extension Advanced Screen Check the Group Pickup box in this screen if you want to enable the group pickup feature for this extension If this extension is added to a pickup group then this phone can be used to pick up calls to any extension that is part of a pickup group See Chapter 16 on page 155 for more information on group pickup Figure 120 FXS Extension Advanced Screen Extra Setting M Group Pickup Apply Back to Peer List X6004 User s Guide Ring Group This chapter shows you how to create and manage ring groups on the X6004 15 1 Ring Group Overview Ring groups on the X6004 refer to grouping sets of extensions for Paging the caller can simply dial a number configured for a group of extensions The telephones with the extensions in the group automatically pick up It 1s similar to creating an automatic conference call Hunting the caller can simply dial a number to reach a group of extensions The extensions ring based on a ringing method you configure For example all extensions can ring at the same time until
196. e 57 Tutorial Peer Info Tab Peer Info The Peer Info screen displays when you log in It allows you to change the password for your VoIP account displayed as SIP Auth Password and the PIN code you use to access the web portal voicemail and the IVR Interactive Voice Response system displayed as Web IVR VM PIN Code X6004 User s Guide Chapter 4 Phone User Tutorial LES The SIP Auth Password field does not display if you connect to the X6004 using a regular analog telephone system Figure 58 Tutorial Changing Security Information SIP Peer 1001 configuration and information Group Sales SIP Auth User Name 1001 SIP Auth Password qaot Confirm Web IVR VM PIN Code pad Confirm Apply Reset the right Click Apply field on the right Click Apply 4 1 4 Personalizing Your Settings Enter the new SIP Auth Password in the field on the left and enter it again in the field on Enter the new Web IVR VM PIN Code in the field on the left and enter it again in the Next configure your extension s call settings Click the Forward Block tab at the top of the screen Figure 59 Tutorial Forward Block Tab Ss Forward Block The following screen displays X6004 User s Guide Chapter 4 Phone User Tutorial Figure 60 Tutorial Configuring Call Settings Call Forward Setting Call Forward Setting Office Hours Office Hours DND Do Not Disturb
197. e 70 Web Configurator Home Sereen Systemi sisccssecpicnissaceciaveesaesricacuaserninendesnmuaaseranienaasnioneee 77 Figure 91 DSI ONG ai ERR e rL ADS PREOUHESSE E PEULER REA ARO RRECAS ESAE READER U A ANA PB AS 80 Figure 72 Maintenance c RODOOE sassis n ict eto iei cnp ntl da p ak E EAER SINE ANEA GRE Ke LE P n FERE 83 Figure 72 Web Configurator Logout Link 12iceictt oret ted dette bed let breit aeter tek a erbe esc br dec de 84 Figure 74 MNabwork Deployment DVOIVIW a2 bysxao i dn DA rta de 4E RR deans anal eas ER RO AN RR XS RR IRR 85 Figur 79 Configuration Network LAN aM 86 Figure 76 Configuration Network gt WAN 1 uuucssccesesenieeusk isisisi reestrini ein deinna aer ainn rE ai 87 Figure 77 Configuration gt Network gt DDNS uussssocie iecur tern RE n ik P KI c ansante iaaa 88 Figure 79 Configuration gt Network gt jew PTT 89 Figure 79 Example of Static Routing TOBOREM 15 1 ied eR M spi oer Do pra o e d D Pt A P EXE a ees 90 Figure 80 Configuration gt Network gt Static Route ssssssesssseeeneeeeenee eee 90 Figure 81 Configuration gt Network gt Static Route gt Add eese sente enne tea ae 91 22 X6004 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 32 SIF Devices and Me ODDO 2 onis pr rt RP PAR NSEE PLA S anA AE PLATE UR PE AERA PULSA RH OSA ROLLS 95 Figure 83 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Global Set
198. e Zone Setup Time Zone Select the time zone at your location Enable Daylight saving Select this if your location uses daylight savings time Daylight savings is a period from late spring to early fall when many places set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Start Date Enter which hour on which day of which week of which month daylight savings time starts X6004 User s Guide Chapter 6 Network Deployment Table 15 Configuration gt Network gt NTP LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Enter which hour on which day of which week of which month daylight savings time ends Offset Enter the amount of time in hours by which to adjust the time during daylight saving period Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 6 6 Static Route Overview In a subnetted LAN environment the X6004 is typically connected to a router The router specifies the subnet to which the X6004 is directly connected and the X6004 has no knowledge of the subnets beyond For instance the X6004 knows about the IP phones in subnet N1 in the following figure However the X6004 is unable to route a packet to phones in subnet N2 because it doesn t know that there is a route through Router R Static routes tell the X6004 about the subnets beyond the router its directly connected to F
199. e pi eia x Eaga dedu den adii NENANA epa diia a e ebd RE RESAN 34 lg u EsEere 1 4 c 35 zc 128 0 e 36 Figure B EAS uid RAO PONS sorain EH rei Ebrb ieee ee 38 Figure 6 Deci OR 38 Figure 7 Outbound Call Routing BESIG 22 uice tete pe bee Pose dei opa taped eo epu ede o xd ida EB FI eR RET Ea 39 Figure 3 Outbound Call Routing Advanced uucemcimece iem be Vi Mb PePRN AREE CHEQUES hola unn Feb ROS ERPEU LUE URDU A 40 Figure 9 Turca LINGUVIBW isexcoossiserenniin este PntELHRSTA ROER VM Epis SU POL KI ont L ARR REL AES aL Y pL d 41 a bom0sMD 0 6 Lm TR TRE 42 Figure 11 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group sees 42 Figure TZ AUG Edit NONY OTOUD s Buses ap ims 43 Figure 13 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Authority Group eeeeeeeeee 43 Figure 14 Authority Group COmmQUIAIONY e 43 Figure 15 Add Multiple SIP Extensions Soa sasecevinins cora tatc taret ads rb nn E ER eu ko ECC ER EI RR SR Et IL ERR PI nu pA tu 44 Figure 16 Authority Group Corner cissicucooieie bn erp E RHE PH EE EHE PIRE RP AUN NE ERE EU casa a 44 Figure ly Connac IF Phoned enisi ert I entero br be eb od p a c o da inde DN 45 Figure 18 Example IP Phone SIP Registration Screen esee eise tha ena nth ana anas 46 Figure 19 Auto PRAVISIOMING c 47
200. e system name is automatically assigned to the X6004 based on when it was added to the ZyStack IPPBX_01 is always the master followed by slaves IPPBX_02 IPPBX_03 and so on Description This field displays the description of this ZyStack member WAN IP This field displays the WAN IP address of the X6004 LAN IP This field displays the LAN IP address of the X6004 Z Interface This field displays the interface LAN or WAN which the X6004s use to form the ZyStack This interface is the same for all X6004 in the ZyStack Type This field displays the role this X6004 performs in the ZyStack The options are Master controls configuration on all the other X6004s Slave all configuration is done on the slave from the master X6004 Add Edit Click the Add icon to create or expand a ZyStack by configuring a new member Click Edit to change the settings of an existing ZyStack member Click Reboot to shut down and restart a specific member of the ZyStack Click Delete to remove an existing member from a ZyStack 23 2 1 ZyStack Add Screen Use this screen to add an X6004 to your ZyStack Click the Add icon in the Configuration gt ZyStack gt Setting screen to view the screen as shown Figure 190 ZyStack Add ZyStack Add Serial Description WAN IP LAN IP Z Interface Failsafe F r E m LAN Active v Add Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 23 ZyStack
201. e the screen immediately If you do not want this screen to update periodically enter 0 FXS Peer This section displays the status detail table Machine ID This field displays the auto configured name of the X6004 Slot This field displays the slot A D where the FXS interface card is installed Port This field displays the port number on the FXS interface card Number This field displays the extension number associated with an FXS port or it displays N A if no FXS extension has been configured for an FXS port Call Status This field displays busy if an FXS extension is currently engaged otherwise it displays idle 25 3 FXO Trunk Status Use the FXO Trunk screen to view status information about external connections via FXO interface cards Click Monitor gt Status Observation gt FXO Trunk in the web configurator to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 25 Status Observation Figure 200 Monitor Status Observation FXO Trunk FXO Trunk Query Machine ID FXO Trunk Machine II IPPBX 001 IPPBX 001 IPPBX 001 IPPBX 001 Refresh interval fo sec Apply Each field is described in the following table Table 101 Monitor gt Status Observation gt FXO Trunk LABEL DESCRIPTION Query Use this section to specify your query criteria You can select an attribute value pair for your search You can choose to query by Mac
202. e uncompressed with variety of data compression utilities for example WinRAR or WinZIP Last Modified This field displays the date and time when the information was retrieved from the X6004 Size This field displays the size of the file Download Click Download to save the file to your computer 29 1 2 Packet Capture Screen Use this screen to log network traffic going through the X6004 LAN or WAN interface Click Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Packet Capture to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 29 Diagnostics Figure 217 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Packet Capture Packet Capture Packet Capture Machine ID fipPBx_o01 Interface WAN x Host e Protocol Al F Stop capture after Packets 1 3000 Stop capture after Sec 1 600 Capture Now File Download Filename Last Modified Size Each field is described in the following table Table 119 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Packet Capture LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID If you have more than one X6004 configured in a ZyStack select the one from which you want to collect information Interface Choose the interface for which you want to log network traffic Host Optionally limit the capture of information to communication with a specific network device Enter the IP address of the network device that the X6004 is communicating with Yo
203. eakerphone One use of this feature can be to make announcements A boss can dial the page group number to say Meeting in five minutes or Lunch time It s on me This example shows you how to create a single page group The paging group is for the marketing team and is made up of extensions 1001 1002 and 1003 The example also gives the right to any member of authority group Basic all extensions in our configuration to call the page group The page group number is 888 it is also configured with a PIN code 444 so that only the people who know the code can page the Marketing group X6004 User s Guide Figure 127 Paging Group Example 1 Chapter 15 Ring Group X6004 calls extensions 1001 g 002 and 1003 Procedure Dials 888 and enters 444 at the prompt Ring Group Group to open the following screen Ring Group Figure 128 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group isadd d Advanced amp edit Delete EETCCINSEECTITON NNEECTTt 7C field and Add to save the ring group Figure 129 Add Ring Group 2 Click the Add icon to open the following screen Type Marketing in the Group Name Ring Group Add Machine ID Group Name fiPPEX_001 Description gt o DA Marketing ring group entry Ring Group Ring Group 3 The Ring Group screen appears as shown Click the Advanced icon next to the Figure 130
204. eate The number of extensions you can create is limited by the subscription service registered on the X6004 see Section 26 6 on page 233 SIP Auth Password When you create multiple SIP extensions you automatically create SIP accounts on the X6004 The user names for these SIP accounts are the extension numbers The passwords for the SIP accounts are also the extension numbers To make the passwords more secure you can add a prefix or a postfix to these extensions For example type 1 in the Prefix field and the SIP account passwords for the SIP extensions you create become 1 extension number You can enter up to three letters numbers or a combination of letters and numbers in the Prefix and Postfix fields DTMF Mode Control how the X6004 handles the tones that the IP phones using these extensions make when they push their buttons One use of the tones is to distinguish between numbers when trying to dial a PSTN phone number You should use the same mode as your VoIP service provider The choices are rfc2833 Follow the RFC 2833 standard and send the DTMF tones in RTP packets inband Send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 can distort the tones info Send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Codec Setting Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want this extensio
205. ed in the following table Table 43 SIP Extension Call Forward LABEL DESCRIPTION Call Forward Use this section to configure call forwarding settings for your extension Setting Office Hours The X6004 has separate rules for call forwarding during office hours then after office hours The settings you configure specify the office hours for this extension and affect call forwarding during those office hours If a call is first handled by auto attendant then it checks the system office hours settings first and applies any forwarding rules before checking the office hours configured in this screen Office Hours Specify the days of the week you want to configure as working days for this extension Time Specify the time range in 24 hour format for the office hours DND Do Not Select Enable and the X6004 will not forward calls to your extension Click on Disturb White List see Section 14 3 5 on page 137 to configure telephone numbers which ignore whether you have DND turned on or off Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Blind Forward Select Enable and specify an extension The X6004 will forward all incoming calls to that extension Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Busy Forward Select Enable and specify an extensio
206. editing 146 hunt 145 overview 145 paging 145 RTP 95 S safety certifications 286 safety warnings 6 save configuration 82 serial number for softphone 47 services 259 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP 34 SIP 34 SIP accounts 166 SIP authentication 43 45 SIP extension registration 260 SIP extensions 37 42 43 status 223 X6004 User s Guide Index SIP peer status 223 SIP registration 46 SIP servers 34 SIP telephones example configuration screen 46 SIP trunk 56 163 adding and editing 167 and auto attendant 170 codecs 169 configuration 166 status 226 slave and ZyStack 209 softphone registration 259 softphones 34 SSLeay License 305 stacking 207 standards supported 285 status 77 status observation 223 subnet 287 subnet mask 288 subnetting 290 subscription services 259 Switch reset 83 syntax conventions 4 Syslog 236 System information 219 system log 229 types of logs 229 system maintenance 253 T telephone exchange device see IP PBX 33 temperature 283 terms explained 37 trademarks 317 traditional PBX 164 trusted peer 37 163 172 adding and editing 171 and codecs 173 configuration 171 tutorial 42 tutorials 41 authority group 42 auto provisioning 46 configure SIP extensions 42 dial conditions 53 feature codes 62 internal calls 42 IP telephones 45 ITSP calls 55 ITSP connection 55 LCR 59 LCRs 52 multiple SIP extensions 44 overview 41 PSTN calls 49 U
207. eer e rte prre 54 Figure 26 LOR to Authority Group ASSIOEWNUIE uiecissos retis earet ti arr eee prre ri PREIS Eee SE ordi rbd dis 54 Figure 37 O0pound Calls Via PSTN e iici A 55 Figure 30 Making ISP ec e a a EE 55 X6004 User s Guide 21 List of Figures Figure 29 Nabwork Cominco te IPSE 25 oec teret koe PrUA SM reet Nen Pee oro E IS Ea o a Ai E PLA PR 56 Figure 40 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group 56 Figure 41 Add SIP TUNK 57 Figure 42 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group 57 Figure 43 SIF Connection Carrie UUW Me 58 Figure 44 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group 58 Figure do Com AA Setting oecucueseteci dsl eed rrean EEEN ada bx ad urn DR PERAN EAAS E UA ERR p 59 Figure EISE ESCAS CNET ec 59 Figure 47 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR sese 59 Figura 48 long_distance call LOR cs hist catia s seal nnani tentis acne b odd Aad ae cas neigh MANNA Rabbi 60 Figure 49 Dial Condition far long distenoe call LOR 1 ceeccsis ee rte p retro rrt pee Pete e rr ctt eeu e recae 61 Figure 50 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management cccceecccccsesseceeeeesseeeeeeeesseececeenseeeseceenseecas 61 Figure 51 LOR to Authority Group Assignment ccc ccosassecicnsusaacadscnstasenic
208. elete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Conference Room List LABEL DESCRIPTION DSP Resource This section displays the DSP resources available for each X6004 in a ZyStack It only displays one X6004 if you have not implemented ZyStacking Machine ID This field displays the name of the X6004 in the ZyStack Conference This field displays the number of DSP channels reserved for conference calls You can reserve DSP channels in the Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt DSP Management screen Share This field displays the number of unassigned DSP channels Unassigned DSP channel are shared by conference calls and calls via SIP trunks Conference This section allows you to view conference room details as well as add or delete Room List conference rooms Delete Select this checkbox and click Delete to remove this conference room from the X6004 Room This field displays the conference room number This is the extension callers should dial to enter this conference room Machine ID This is the system name of the X6004 Number This is the number of participants that can join this conference call at any one time Description This field displays the description you enter to identify this conference room Add Edit Delete Click the Add icon to create a new conference room Click the Edit icon to change the settings of an existing conference room on th
209. elete dial condition 188 example 39 59 60 tutorial 52 LCR Least Cost Routing 38 185 LCRs and authority groups 192 and outbound line groups 163 194 LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol 35 Least Cost Routing see LCR 38 185 LED 283 legacy PBX 33 license key 262 license status 262 license upgrade 261 linking groups 196 Linux 297 local calls 37 log 229 and syslog servers 236 configuration 234 email server 235 filtering results 231 IPPBX 229 myZyXEL com 229 remote server 237 settings 232 settings overview 233 severity levels 229 summary 233 user 229 viewing 230 log consolidation 236 login 75 to web portal 265 logs adding external syslog 210 configuration 209 types of events 209 maintenance 253 make ITSP calls tutorial 55 make PSTN calls tutorial 49 making internal calls tutorial 42 manage administrator accounts 246 managing authority groups 191 managing auto attendant 179 managing groups 191 managing outbound line groups 164 193 managing subscription services 259 managing the device 35 good habits 35 using the command interface see CLI 35 master and ZyStack 209 monitoring extension status 225 FXO links 225 SIP links 226 multiple SIP extension tutorial 44 music on hold file format 202 management 202 overview 202 MySQL 239 myZyXEL com 259 registration 259 N NAT 294 navigation panel 78 Netkit Telnet 312 network traffic information 249 night service and hunt group 150
210. en displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack File System These fields display the current utilization of the available memory on the X6004 They are divided into the following categories Flash This field displays the percentage of the total built in memory currently being used up on the X6004 HDD This field displays the percentage of your hard disk memory if a hard disk is installed currently used up on the X6004 Extension These fields display the utilization percentage of your available SIP extensions and FXS extension An extension is considered to be utilized as soon as it is created The number of SIP extensions you are allowed to create on the X6004 is limited by the subscription service on the X6004 The number of FXS extensions you are allowed to create on the X6004 is limited by the number of FXS ports you have installed on the X6004 The FXS ports are used to connect analog phones to the X6004 5 5 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes 5 6 Icons in the Web Configurator The following table describes the icons used in the configuration screens of the X6004 Table 11 Icon Explanation Table ICON NAME DESCRIPTION Add This icons is used to create new components such as eh extensions or groups Edit This icon takes you to a screen where you can perform basic E configurat
211. endant Table 72 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant LABEL DESCRIPTION Description This field displays the description for an Auto Attendant Add Advanced Click Edit Delete Add to create a new Auto Attendant Advanced to configure an Auto Attendant Edit to change the name or description of an Auto Attendant Delete remove an existing Auto Attendant 19 4 14 Add Edit Auto Attendant Use this screen to add or edit an auto attendant To access this screen click the Add or Edit icon in the Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant screen to view the screen as shown BES Only the Add Auto Attendant screen is shown In the Edit Auto Attendant screen the field names change from Add to Edit Figure 162 Add Edit Auto Attendant Auto Attendant Name Description Add Auto Attendant m m Add Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 73 Add Edit Auto Attendant LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Type a name for this Auto Attendant You can use alphanumeric characters as well as the underscore _ Spaces are not allowed Description Type a description for this Auto Attendant You can use alphanumeric characters as well as the underscore Spaces are allowed Add Edit Click Add to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the prev
212. enidec erdt teet educta td dot vidus ku id dde vita ddduc uud 134 143 4 SIP Extension Call Forward Sree scssi n Er eh eR oe page 135 1455 5 DND Wike LIST iitedcces i e Y REOR N PERI UR ERER RN 137 j ul pDEt mE gue i A 137 13 5 7 RUAN T E E NEAS rade Uo IEEE BE LER vadat ban bue KP adeb ladis 138 143 8 VOI Wall SE OS cR 139 753 9 SIP Extension Advanced Screen iine den io yt p Dar tor ot ih ota 139 T3 STO Add an FXS EXIBREI IS ics cese p te eb sp Rehan T Spe BI ERE PUER ed pde cite PIRE e pedi el oye 141 14 3 11 Configure FAS EXTODSIODIS c tesccccscsscuccesnsnsanrececzscencveensszauureenataaueveamnaaaniieeaacauretenns 142 14 3 12 FAS Extension Gall Forward Soren 2 vcro PIERII DIETE ER Ent ste ade 143 14 3 13 FAS Extension Voice Mall SOFGBlli oret Ere EI ToEMER era E33IS REB S ah aE Ebr FEES ER HER R 143 14 3 14 FAS Extension Advanced Sree doceret e nri d bnicE Foul IIR Eni dE ERE EON erinus 144 Chapter 15 Ring GOUD m V E0 145 1T RRO ROPE IVP e rcae as caaiiasecn saparcnetas manasa ETARE EPEA NATASA NRE EEE 145 15 2 Ring Group Configuration e a 145 1521ra a Now Rng EDU 3idiazustpxer isi oe a 146 19 2 2 Edit Ring Group Descrip uocasieso ce ER IEEE EP ERR EHEE EYES EEEEH I ee da R 146 15 2 3 Configure Ring Group SOUNGS auiccucesees eterna eerta reae apunta Epl da ate Spr durat e Et i 147 15 2 4 Add Edit Page Group Sereen iussis inea kei Eoi eia S i b aa ERR EE kae Sa Rad kd Etha n pid 148 15
213. ens to manage administrator accounts and use diagnostic features on the X6004 Administrator Username Password Use this screen to change the password of the currently logged in administrator account Administrator List Use this screen to manage administrator accounts on the X6004 Diagnostics Use this screen to configure data capture of VoIP packets for analysis Backup amp Restore Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the X6004 to its factory defaults Firmware Upgrade Use this screen to perform firmware upgrades on the X6004 License Control Use this section to make sure that your X6004 is registered with myZyXEL com Registration Use this screen to register your X6004 with myZyXEL com If you don t have an account with myZyXEL com follow the directions in this screen to set one up Reboot Use this screen to reboot the X6004 5 4 Dashboard System Information The Dashboard screen contains system information about the X6004 It is also a graphical representation of the X6004 and any ZyStack members if configured Click the Dashboard button in any of the web configurator screens to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator Figure 71 Dashboard Refresh None x Refresh Now Interval System Information 172 23 37 201 192 168 1 10 Master 1 00 AVA 0 b2 IPPBX Information nm m O
214. ension on the X6004 See Chapter 14 on page 125 for information on how to configure email forwarding of voice mail messages 10 1 1 Mail Relay A mail relay is a simple mail server that accepts e mails filters them based on pre defined criteria and forwards them to another server A mail relay adds another security layer in your organization If your organization uses a mail relay and you are implementing the forwarding of voice messages to email accounts then you must configure mail relay settings on the X6004 10 2 Voice Mail Screen Use this screen to set up the voice mail settings on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Voice Mail X6004 User s Guide Chapter 10 Voice Mail Figure 93 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Voice Mail Voice Mail Management Per call Max Length ian seconds Per user Max Usage i300 seconds Mail Relay Domain IP Mail Relay Port Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 27 Configuration PBX Server Configuration Voice Mail LABEL DESCRIPTION Voice Mail Management Per call Max Specify the maximum number of seconds for each voice mail message This value Length can be from 1 to 90 seconds Per user Max Usage Specify the maximum number of seconds for all voice mail messages for each extension When a user hits this limit then the X6004 will no l
215. ent for auto attendant recordings Press OK when you are done X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant Figure 159 Audio File Settings Name untitied gt Save As Remove Format carr u Law Attributes 8 000 kHz 8 Bit Mono Cancel 5 Confirm your settings Specify a location for the audio file by browsing to a suitable location on your file system Click Save when you are finished Figure 160 Confirm File Settings TO 0 0l Save in f Desktop gt amp ee E3 My Computer ISE My Network Places HillEveryOnceInAWhile RFCs I scripts Scripts 11 30 Femme wee 0 rz 089 Save as type Sounds wav b Cancel Format CCITT u Law 8 000 kHz 8 Bit M 19 4 Auto Attendant Management Use this screen to view add edit or delete auto attendants from the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant Figure 161 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant Auto Attendant List ee ee NNMEMMNIKBKBEEEKENNN AAL AAL a W AAZ AA2 d B Each field is described in the following table Table 72 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Attendant List Name This field displays the name assigned to an Auto Attendant X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Att
216. ently depending on which you use In this case choosing minimize cost may inform the network provider to use the lower cost route to send your VoIP traffic X6004 User s Guide Chapter 9 QoS BS It is recommended to use the Minimize Delay class for VoIP traffic 9 1 2 DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets based on the application types and traffic flow so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along their route Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 9 1 3 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different forwarding treatment Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies The X6004 allows you to mark outgoing frames with following PHB classifications Assured Forwarding AF This is a PHB group allow
217. eoumaannuinon ube raisi n a TE 62 Figure 52 Outbound Calls via ITOP inssin enkiu aa uid eid iA a E 62 Figure 53 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Feature Code 63 Figure 54 ZYXEL Y300 Yoicemail Conngurglofi uuuscenaeeebeer dn iced viam be en ERO EASE EE 63 Figure 55 Tutorial Web Portal IP Aggies 11i rti repeti rrr LR RR PAARE EEPRLA D ERA ER PRIM ASERRRRL ASA PER L3 65 Foue TIENEN LOG TO seneni amine aetati pecia Epp Cx eb EE EANA aa Ub EENEN 66 Figure 57 Tutorial Peer Info TAD sciis cree sessveduevseasieaisatssravinadhsaneinndpesivuguraiednsiedisd ar piedadineiedeeneds 66 Figure 59 Tutorial Changing Security IMonmaliorn uie ri rrr t i iain aun 67 Figure 99 Tutar Foward BLOK E aevo ece uite Fu ubi be o pP abeen pie te edu Febr HT CLR TOM EE AHORA 67 Figure 60 Tutorial Configuring Call SQUWiQS Ad 68 Figure GT Tutorial DND White LIST Tr 69 Figure 62 Dearie Fand Mo i qc 69 Fowo Toorak BIER LE pe 69 Figure 64 Tutorial Voicemail MTS eR S T 70 Figure 65 Tutorial Setting Up Voicemail e 70 Figure 66 Tutorial Web Phone TaD sssaaa A rtASHS REPE ASSSSEPAUA BRE RRM AE ARRE RON SANRpEDAA 71 Figure Gf Tutorial Security POP UP oe ec 71 Figure 69 Tutorial The Web PRONG m 71 Figure 69 Web Configurator LOONT ictus ve cisiataats So castih So ladeaslenascdetin eadiabih eS EEAS A SAS EAN 76 Figur
218. er ID Disable Take the following steps to configure this screen 1 Office Hours Ensure that the Mon through Fri boxes are checked Clear the Sat and Sun boxes X6004 User s Guide Chapter 4 Phone User Tutorial In the Time field use the drop down lists to enter 09 00 17 30 2 Do Not Disturb Ensure that Disable is selected You can turn this on later if you want 3 White List Click the White List button In the screen that displays enter each phone number in the Number field and click Add after each one Click Apply when you are finished Figure 61 Tutorial DND White List Number Add 555123456 555456789 Apply Cancg 4 Call Forwarding Ensure that Blind Forward is set to Disable In the Busy Forward row select Voice Mail In the No Answer Forward row select Enable and click Find Me List In the screen that displays enter each phone number in the Number field and click Add after each one Click Apply when you are finished Figure 62 Tutorial Find Me List Number Add 987 654 o 321 o Tij Apply Cancel In the After Office Hours row select Voice Mail 5 Black List Select Enable and click the Black List button In the screen that displays enter each phone number in the Number field and click Add after each one Click Apply when you are finished Figure 63 Tutorial Black List Number 555999888 555888777 Tij Apply Cancel X6004
219. er X6004 in a ZyStack You can quickly view LED status voice interface card status and peer X6004 status Click on the ZyXEL logo to go to the status screen of the X6004 or click on the individual ports to go to their configuration screens D The bottom part of the screen shows you the amount of flash memory used as well as the extension capacity for the FXS ports and SIP accounts X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator 5 3 1 The Navigation Panel Go to individual feature configuration screens via the navigation buttons The following table shows you the submenus navigation panels associated with each navigation button Table 8 Navigation Buttons Sub links Overview CONFIGURATION MONITOR REPORT MAINTENANCE D Network LE WAN DDNS NTP Static Route PBX Server Configuration g Extension Management PE TUT Line Management Group Management Call Services ZyStack a Setting Intranet Status Ww Monitor W LOGS Administration Administrator a Username Password System Information System Log If status Observation CDR Administrator List ABEST Diagnostics SEAS HORE b Backup amp Restore ESO Ro Firmware Upgrade SIP Trunk L4 License Control Registration EE Reboot The following table describes the links in the navigation panels Table 9 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Netw
220. er a caller can dial an extension number directly from this menu Extension Number Forward to a If you want this auto attendant to forward calls directly to a specific extension specific extension without playing any audio file then select this option and type the extension you directly want to forward calls to This option can be used for a fax line or direct line to a specific extension Note This field is only available for the initial auto attendant menu Options This section displays the actions configured for this auto attendant menu Action This field displays the digits a caller must dial to perform an action Description This field displays the description for this action Action This field displays the function of an action Extension This field displays either the extension that this call is forwarded to or it displays Next Menu if the action for this auto attendant option is to Forward to next menu Click Next Menu to configure the settings for a sub menu Add Edit Delete Click Add to create a new option for this auto attendant menu Edit to change the settings for an auto attendant option Delete to remove this option from this Menu Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the previous screen without applying any unsaved changes X6004 User s Guide LCR This chapter shows you how to configure dialing rules also referred to as
221. er installation you can connect to the X6004 and use a computer to make calls via the X6004 Refer to the documentation that came with your ZyXEL softphone X6004 User s Guide Chapter 31 myZyXEL com BS At the time of writing ZyXEL offers the V100 SoftPhone Contact your vendor for more information SIP extension registration the number of SIP extensions you can create on the X6004 is limited by your service subscription In order to add more SIP extensions to the X6004 you need to register additional extensions via myZyXEL com 31 2 Registration Use this screen to register your X6004 with myZyXEL com and activate a service such as a softphone license Click Maintenance gt License Control gt Registration in the navigation panel to open the screen shown next Figure 220 Maintenance gt License Control gt Registration Registration Device Registration This device is not registered to myZyXEL com Please enter information below to register your device If you don t have myZyXEL com account please select ndw myZyXEL com account below If you have a myZyXEL com account but you forget your User Name or Password please go to www myZyXEL com for help New myZyxXEL com account o Existing myZyXEL com account User Name Check Password type username and password from 6 to 20 characters Confirm Password ern E Mail Address 1 Country Apply Each field is described in the following
222. ers pickup the call by dialing the feature code for Group Pickup See Section 7 5 on page 100 for information on how to configure the feature codes on the X6004 The following figure shows a pickup group called SALES Extensions 1001 1005 are in the SALES pickup group When a call comes in to extension 1001 then people with extensions 1002 1003 1004 or 1005 can pickup the call by dialing the feature code for Group Pickup for example 94 is the default Similarly when a call comes in to any of the other extensions in this pickup group then any of the group members can pickup that call Figure 135 Pickup Group Overview When two calls come in at the same time then the call that has rung the longest is picked up first when a group member dials the Group Pickup code When two group members try to pick up a call for someone in their pickup group then the first person to dial the Group Pickup code answers the call X6004 User s Guide 155 Chapter 16 Pickup Group 16 1 1 Pickup Group Settings Use this screen to manage pickup groups on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group Figure 136 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group Pickup Group List Delete Wadd B Edit Delette ee a IPPBX_001 pickupgroup pickupgroup Delete Each field is described in the following table Table 57 Configuration gt PBX gt Extensi
223. et Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services X6004 User s Guide ZyStack This chapter shows you how to combine two or more X6004s to expand your IP PBX capabilities and utilize a failsafe mechanism in case of a breakdown 23 1 ZyStack Overview A ZyStack 1s the aggregation of multiple X6004s under a single management IP address A ZyStack provides two major advantages Firstly it allows you to pool the resources of individual X6004s Secondly it provides a failsafe mechanism in case of a breakdown of one of the X6004s in a ZyStack When you create a ZyStack the X6004s can take on a role of a master or a slave There can only be one master X6004 You can manage the configuration of the master and slave X6004s by logging into the LAN or WAN IP address of the master X6004 23 1 1 ZyStack Requirements In order for ZyStack to work you must follow these guidelines All the X6004s should use the same interface either LAN or WAN to create a ZyStack The setting on the master X6004 determines which interface the X6004s should use All the X6004 should be on the same subnet This is necessary for the X6004s to be able to backup each other The failsafe mechanism utilizes IP alias IP alias allows the X6004 to communicate via two IP addresses The first is the IP address assigned to the X6004 itself and the second is the IP address of the X600
224. f auto attendant Audio File State This field displays Uploaded if an audio file has been uploaded for this menu If no audio file has been uploaded for this menu it displays No audio file Playback Click Playback to play the audio file uploaded for this menu The file is played by the default media player installed on your computer Dial Extension Specify whether a caller can dial an extension number directly from this menu Extension Number Forward to a If you want this auto attendant to forward calls directly to a specific extension specific extension without playing any audio file then select this option and type the extension you directly want to forward calls to This option can be used for a fax line or direct line to a specific extension Note This field is only available for the initial auto attendant menu Options This section displays the actions configured for this auto attendant menu Key This field displays the digits a caller must dial to perform an action Description This field displays the description for this action Action This field displays the function of an action X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant Table 74 Auto Attendant Menu Settings continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Extension This field displays either the extension that this call is forwarded to or it displays Next Menu if the action for this auto attendant option is to F
225. fter Mailed Click Apply 4 1 6 Using the Web Phone IP Phone Users Only Click the Web Phone tab at the top of the screen X6004 User s Guide Chapter 4 Phone User Tutorial Figure 66 Tutorial Web Phone Tab wy Web Phone If a screen similar to the following displays click Yes Figure 67 Tutorial Security Pop Up Security Information xj This page contains both secure and nonsecure V items Do you want to display the nonsecure items No More Info The following screen displays Figure 68 Tutorial The Web Phone Connected 1001 00 00 00 Mute BES Make sure you have a headset or speakers and a microphone connected to your computer and that your soundcard is working correctly try listening to an audio file or recording a voice note to check if there is a problem X6004 User s Guide Chapter 4 Phone User Tutorial The following table describes how to use the web phone to perform some basic phone functions Table 7 Tutorial Basic Web Phone Call Features FEATURE PROCEDURE Dial a number Click each numeral using the mouse pointer The number displays on the screen Use the Clear button to delete a numeral Make a call Dial the number then press the Dial Pick up button Receive a call When a call is incoming press the Dial Pick up button End a call Press the Hang
226. gate through the auto attendant s menus When configuring auto attendant you must choose a number that the caller should dial and an associated function for that option The following example shows the options you can assign when the caller dials 1 as he or she moves through your customized auto attendant Figure 155 Auto Attendant Menus ANS AWS When a caller dials 1 in Menu 1 you can direct them to an extension A move them to the next menu B or allow them to hear the menu again C The same options are available in Menu 2 with the addition of going back to Menu 1 D 19 3 Auto Attendant Audio Files This section describes how to record the prompts that callers hear when they hear the auto attendant menus The audio files you record must meet the following criteria e G711 format voice file wav law 8 bit mono mode Size limit of a single auto attendant message cannot exceed 600 kb Size limit of all auto attendant voice files is 10 Mb per X6004 or per ZyStack 19 3 1 Recording Auto Attendant Audio Files Follow the steps in this section to record audio files for use by auto attendant LES The example shown here uses the components available in the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system to create the audio files Use this section as a guideline only LES Make sure you have a microphone connected to your computer or that your system has an internal microphone and that it is enabled 1 Open your
227. group in the Selected column by clicking on it and then click the Up button to raise its priority Highlight an outbound line group in the Selected column by clicking on it and then click the Down button to lower its priority Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the LCR List screen without saving changes Dial Condition List Delete Select the dial conditions that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Dial Condition This field displays the dial conditions string of digits that are used by this outbound dialing rule LCR Add Edit Delete Click Add to create a new dial condition for this outbound dialing rule LCR Click Edit to change the settings of an existing dial condition for this outbound dialing rule LCR Click Delete to remove an existing dial condition from this outbound dialing rule LCR 20 2 2 Add Edit LCR Dial Condition Use this screen to set up a dialing condition for an LCR To access this screen click the Add or Edit icon in the Dial Condition List section of the LCR screen you are configuring to view a screen as shown Only the Add Dial Condition screen is shown In the Edit Dial Condition screen some of the fields are read only X6004 User s Guide Chapter 20 LCR When creating a new LCR you must first configure the LCR Data portion of the LCR configuration screen and press Ap
228. gt Black List Figure 87 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block gt Black List System wise blacklist Number Add fij Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 22 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block gt Black List LABEL DESCRIPTION Number Type the telephone number you want the X6004 to block from calling extensions in your telephone network Click Add to place this number in the blacklist You can also use the letters N X and Z to represent numbers and the period to include any number that starts with the digits you specify Delete Highlight an existing telephone number in the blacklist and click the Delete icon to remove this telephone number from the blacklist Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the Call Block screen 7 5 Setting Feature Codes Use this screen to set values for the feature codes the X6004 supports Users can dial these codes to enable or disable the features listed below by entering these codes on their phone s keypad Click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Feature Code to open the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 7 SIP Server Figure 88 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Feature Code Feature code setting Black
229. hat allows users to manage some of the settings related to their telephone extension Each extension created on the X6004 has an associated account which allows it to login to the web portal When you login to the web portal you can pick up and make calls via your browser The web portal can be used by members of your organization who are working away from the office As long as they have a reliable Internet connection they can login to the web portal and answer and make calls from the same extension as they have in the office For example a user working from home can log into the web portal with their desk phone extension 1001 and use the HTML based phone to call extension 1002 He can also receive calls directed to extension 1001 Figure 223 Web Portal Overview 1005 32 2 Web Portal Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type https and the IP address of the X6004 for example the default LAN IP address 1s 192 168 1 12 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER X6004 User s Guide Chapter 32 Web Portal 3 The login screen appears Enter your extension number and the associated Web password in the upper part of the login screen and click Login LES The web password is set up by the administrator when the extension is initially created See Chapter 14 on page 125 Figure 224 Web Portal Login IPPBX X6004 Language Engish 7 Enter Extension number and PIN Code then click Login Extensio
230. have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement 12 General X6004 User s Guide 315 Appendix B Open Software Announcements This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties X6004 User s Gui
231. he Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR
232. he configuration screen for this extension raat to Authority Click this to go back to the main Authority Group screen roup 14 2 2 Add Edit Authority Group Use the Add Authority Group screen to create a new authority group Use the Edit Authority Group screen to change the name or description of an existing authority group Only the screen used to add a new authority group is shown Click the Add or Edit icon in the Authority Group screen to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group BS Only the Add Authority Group screen is shown In the Edit Authority Group screen not all of the fields are available Figure 105 Add Edit Authority Group Authority Group Add Authority Group Machine ID IPPBX 001 Group Name Description Ada Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 38 Add Edit Authority Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID This field is only available when adding a new authority group If you have configured ZyStack select the X6004 on which you want to create this authority group Group Name Type a new name or modify an existing name for this authority group You can use up to 128 alphanumeric characters and spaces are not allowed Description Type a brief description for this authority group You can use up to 128 alphanumeric characters and spaces are allowed Add If you are creating a new authority group click Add
233. he time interval during which the X6004 merges logs with identical messages into one log Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the Log Setting screen without saving your changes 26 3 3 Edit Syslog Server Settings Use this screen to edit the remote syslog server settings To access this screen click the Edit icon of one of the Remote Server columns in the Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting screen Figure 207 Report LOGS System Log Log Setting Edit Remote Log Active Log Format Server Address Log Facility Log Settings for Remote Server 1 myzyXEL com ZyXEL VRPT Locar1 Disable All Logs Enable Normal Logs Enable All Logs B Enable Alert Log All Logs IPPBX User Default Apply Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 26 System Log Each field is described in the following table Table 109 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Remote Log LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Settings for Remote Server Active Click Active to enable syslog logging Server Address Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs Log Facility Select a location from the drop down list box The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documenta
234. hed by dialing a single phone number This can be used for a call center application Page Group Configure sets of extensions that can all be called at the same time by dialing a single number page group number When a page group number is dialed all of the extensions automatically pick up via speakerphone Emergency Call Configure emergency telephone numbers which are given the highest priority for outbound lines on the X6004 Conference Calling Configure conference rooms which can be accessed by callers from within your organization as well as from outside your organization X6004 User s Guide Chapter 34 Product Specifications Table 134 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Music on Hold Specify an audio file to play for callers who are placed on hold G 711 format audio file wav u law Distinctive Ring Specify different rings for calls based on the source of the call Auto Callback The X6004 can automatically call back a busy extension once it frees up Call Parking The X6004 allows you to put a call on hold and pick up the call again from another location within your organization ZyStack Configure up to 5 X6004 to work together under a single management IP address Call Detail Record The X6004 can generate call detail records and send them to a MySQL database and the aged file compressed file containing CDRs can be sent to the administrator via email
235. hen editing a Trusted Peer configuration Group Name Type the name of this trusted peer connection You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are not allowed Description Type the description for this trusted peer connection You can use alpha numeric characters and spaces are allowed Apply Click this to save your changes Back to Outbound Click this to go to the Outbound Line Group screen without saving your changes Group 18 6 2 Trusted Peer Configuration Use this screen to configure a trusted peer Click the Advanced icon in the Trusted Peer section of the Outbound Line Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown Figure 151 Trusted Peer Configuration Trusted Peer Setting Trusted Peer Setting SIP Server Address SIP Server Port SIP Service Domain DTMF Mode CODEC Setting 5060 Apply Cancel Table 71 Trusted Each field is described in the following table Peer Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the trusted peer You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy redirect or register server SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server s listening port number Keep the default value if you are not sure of this value SIP Service Domain Enter the SIP service domain name In the full SIP URI this is the part after
236. hine ID choose the X6004 if you have a ZyStack configured for which you want to view status details of FXO connections Call Status select whether you want to view status details about FXO lines that are currently busy or idle Click Query to update the status detail table in the FXO Trunk section of the screen Refresh interval Enter how often seconds you want the X6004 to update this screen Click Apply to update the screen immediately If you do not want this screen to update periodically enter 0 FXO Trunk This section displays the status detail table Machine ID This field displays the auto configured name of the X6004 Slot This field displays the slot A D where the FXO interface card is installed Port This field displays the port number on the FXO interface card Group Name This field displays the outbound line group name to which an FXO line is assigned Call Status This field displays busy if an FXO line is currently engaged otherwise it displays idle 25 4 SIP Trunk Status Use the SIP Trunk screen to view status information about external connections to other SIP servers Click Monitor gt Status Observation gt SIP Trunk in the web configurator to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 25 Status Observation Figure 201 Monitor Status Observation SIP Trunk SIP Trunk Query Machine ID hd IPPBX_001 iw Query 0 sec Refresh SIP T
237. his typically involves enabling auto provisioning and specifying the protocol to use HTTP at the time of writing See the documentation that came with your ZyXEL IP phone for information on how to do this Once the IP phones receive their configuration information via auto provisioning they will automatically register with the X6004 You can make internal calls by dialing the extension number assigned to each phone X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 2 Making PSTN Calls The following section shows you how to make and receive calls via a connection to the PSTN This example covers Connecting to PSTN configuring the outbound line group connection settings from the FXO interface card to the PSTN Dialing Rule for PSTN creating a rule which tells the X6004 when to use the PSTN connection when completing outbound calls LCR to Authority Group Assignment giving extensions the right to make outbound calls via the PSTN connection Figure 23 Making a PSTN Call The X6004 matches this number with an LCR applies an offset strips off the 0 and routes the call to Caller dials PSTN 05555555 1001 3 2 1 Connecting to PSTN This example assumes that the X6004 has an FXO interface card already installed refer to the Quick Start Guide and that you have connected your telephone cables to the outlets that connect to your local telephone company The front of your X6004 should look as shown
238. his list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution and 3 Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time Each revision is distinguished by a version number You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION ITS CONTRIBUTORS OR THE AUTHOR S OR OWNER S OF THE SOFTWARE BE X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealing in this
239. his screen to configure the required information for a static route Figure 81 Configuration Network Static Route Add Static Route Add a New Static Route Destination Network Subnet Mask 255 255 255 255 w Gateway IP Network Interface LAN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Configuration gt Network gt Static Route gt Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Add a New Static Route Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Network always based on network number Subnet Mask Select the IP subnet mask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Network This is a read only field indicating that this static route is configured for the LAN Interface Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the X6004 Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh X6004 User s Guide Chapter 6 Network Deployment X6004 User s Guide PART II IP PBX SIP Server 95 Auto Provision 103 QoS 107 Voice Mail 111 Phonebook 113 DSP Management 119 Office Hours 123 Authority Group 125 Ring Group 145 Pickup Group 155 Call Access Code 159 Outbound Line Group 163 Auto Attendant 175 LCR 185
240. ial condition is in acceptable format Note You should make sure to create unique dial conditions for each LCR The X6004 is not able to distinguish between LCRs if they have the same dial condition Number Pattern This field allows you to test whether a number dialed from one of the extensions Test meets the criteria specified in the Dial Condition field Type a number you want to test and click the Right button An O appears if the number you typed matches the dial condition An X appears if the number you typed does not match the dial condition Dial Number This field displays the phone number sent from the X6004 to this outbound line Viewer group You must click on an outbound line group in the Channel column of this screen to view the number sent from the X6004 to the outside line X6004 User s Guide Chapter 20 LCR Table 79 LCR Dial Condition LABEL DESCRIPTION Channel This column identifies the outbound line groups for this outbound dialing rule LCR Offset Specify how many initial digits of the dialed number should not be included in the number going out of the X6004 Length Specify whether the number dialed should be limited in length If you set a limit the numbers which extend beyond the limit will be cut off by the IPPBX Prefix Specify a number which should be appended to the beginning of the dialed number before it is sent out from the X6004 Postfix Spec
241. ible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID X6004 User s Guide 287 Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 236 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 r _ msi m SS 1 M I f po Ss EX A P BEE am m m m m m m m m m How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks 288 A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 136 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example OCTET OCTET OCTET Se TOE 192 168 1 2 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111114 11111111 0000
242. icon in the in the FXO Trunk section of the Outbound Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown Figure 145 AA for FXO Trunks AA Setting Auto Attendant Apply 44 Extension Number for FAX Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 65 AA for Incoming Calls LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply AA Select the Auto Attendant you want to use when calls come in on this outbound line group If you want to forward all incoming calls on this FXO trunk to be forwarded to a fax machine located at a specific extension then select FAX Extension This field is only available if you select FAX in the Apply AA field Type the Number for Fax extension of the Fax machine you want to forward calls to Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to go to the Outbound Group screen without saving your changes 18 4 SIP Trunk Configuration SIP trunks allow you to connect to VoIP service provider In order to create a SIP trunk you must already have a SIP account and a network connection to your VoIP service provider X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group 18 4 1 Add Edit SIP Trunk The screens for editing or adding SIP trunks on the X6004 contain the same fields Only the screen used to add SIP trunks is shown below Click the Add or Edit icon in the SIP Trunk section of the Outbound Line Group configuration screen to
243. ify a number which should be appended to the end of the dialed number before it is sent out from the X6004 Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Group Management This chapter shows you how to manage authority groups and outbound line groups on the X6004 21 1 Group Management Overview Group management allows you to control the types of calls made via the X6004 You can manage the types of calls extensions within authority groups can make as well as the types of calls that callers from outside your organization can complete via the X6004 You grant calling rights by creating associations or links between the various logical entities configured on the X6004 The following sections give an overview of granting calling rights to authority groups see Section 21 1 1 on page 191 followed by granting calling rights to outbound line groups see Section 21 1 2 on page 193 21 1 1 Managing Authority Groups You control extensions within an authority group by associating linking authority groups with Authority Groups When you create an authority group it is by default linked to all other authority groups created on the X6004 and all the other authority groups are also linked to it This means that any extension created on the X6004 can call any other extension created on the X6004 regardless if they are part of the same author
244. igure 79 Example of Static Routing Topology N2 N1 po 6 6 1 Configuring Static Route Use this screen to look at static routes in the X6004 Click Configuration gt Network gt Static Route to open the Static Route screen Figure 80 Configuration gt Network gt Static Route Static Route Delete Add fil Delete ES A catenarie enore aneertece i 1 O 192 168 5 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 LAN hmi Delete X6004 User s Guide Chapter 6 Network Deployment The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Configuration Network Static Route LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select this checkbox and click Delete to remove this static route from the X6004 Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Network always based on network number Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask of the static route Gateway IP This is the IP address of the gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Network This field specifies the interface of the static route Interface Add Delete Use the Add and Delete icons to create or remove static routes respectively 6 6 2 Add a Static Route Click the Add icon in the Configuration gt Network gt Static Route screen The screen shown next appears Use t
245. igure T45 AA Tor FAO Tia ci sass sass peas oap an os cc o eR n a Hd pe d s a rH a e t 166 Figure 146 Add Edit SIP TUNK aem M TT 167 Figure 147 Contgure a SIP TUNK qu 168 Faure T48 ARTO SIF TUNES aiei RS 170 Figure T49 DID Mappihg Solid sci idcitapscssicrariccraiecsainns ticsadanetaacuiantindainnsanaanmeieaana EE PRI DH MAE ENDE RM 171 Figure 150 Add Edit Trusted POE e 171 Figure 151 Trusted Peer Configuration osse eee ec tandi nana n rn tnn ka RR ANNAN RA d oliasioaaeeaiinnds 172 Figure T52 FANG GRAIL xdetasebuetesqrtittest tuse ne top nd eie et d eec ted eu bue eia EMI 175 Figure 153 Auto Attendant Default Siruciure occi pont rt th prre Fra 1 d o d e Fata dS odd 176 Figure 154 Auto Attendant Custom Structure eee sesenta kn tht a ka E bna a aka eua 176 Figure 155 Auto Atiendant I S X XX 177 FOWE T55 Sound ROST oa 178 Foue T ran s aR 178 Figure 158 Saving AUG PIGS Ne 178 Figure 199 Audi File SMU Lesen soon pie Pn FEkk i ki ERR Ce a pa tte Kl C LH Cb ka a dx o a te a 179 Figure 160 Cong Fle Colg aasipbosqetbeteugariziasttsm aile eee pi le dereriin a 179 Figure 161 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant 179 Figure 102 Add Edit Auto Attendant 1s emeret nra X erra ERR ER Pn a En ged RR Ra Ln ga 180 Figure 163 Auto Attendant Menu Settings 1 ucesceeeeeiee r
246. il field of the LDAP phonebook to logon name Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the logon name field of the LDAP phonebook to mobile Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the mobile field of the LDAP phonebook to ext Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the ext field of the LDAP phonebook to country Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the country field of the LDAP phonebook to home Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the home field of the LDAP phonebook to department Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the department field of the LDAP phonebook to Modify Click Modify to save any changes you made to the mappings of the fields on the LDAP phonebook to the LDAP database Default Click Default to set every field in this screen to the factory defaults configured on the X6004 Note This not only sets the fields to default values but also automatically saves the default mappings to the X6004 name This table displays the phonebook entries retrieved from the LDAP database department Regular update at Select this and specify the time in hour and minute format at which the X6004 should update the LDAP phonebook with the LDAP database Click Set to save this setting Refresh Click Refresh to immediately update the LDAP phonebook with the LDAP datab
247. il the two retaining arms click into place Replace the hatch cover and the screw Co X6004 User s Guide Chapter 12 DSP Management Figure 99 Installing a DSP module e A t v fee 12 1 2 Removing a DSP Module Take the following steps to remove a DSP module from the X6004 1 Ensure the power is off and all cables are disconnected Lay the X6004 upside down on a flat dry surface The DSP hatch is located on the base of the X6004 2 Unscrew and remove the DSP hatch retaining screw 3 Remove the DSP hatch cover 4 Gently press the retaining arms away from the module as shown in the figure When both retaining arms are disengaged from the module the module springs up to its angled position DO NOT pull the DSP module up without first disengaging the retaining arms This could damage the module or the connector on the X6004 5 Remove the DSP module Replace the hatch cover and the screw Figure 100 Removing a DSP Module 12 2 DSP Management The X6004 automatically detects the number of DSP channels available for processing telephone conversations The number of DSP channels is based on the DSP modules installed on the X6004 The X6004 automatically assigns DSP channels to service the analog phone connections FXS ports available on the X6004 It also automatically assigns DSP channels to the analog connections to the PSTN FXO ports The remaining DSP channels can be divided between the SIP connect
248. in the following figure LES Note that the FXO interface card is installed in slot B and ports 1 4 are used for the connections You will use this information in a web configurator screen Figure 24 FXO Interface Card Connection X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Procedure 1 Inthe web configurator click Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group to open the following screen Figure 25 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group Qi add AP Advanced MU Arcam SIP Trunk aS TT NECI ac Trusted Peer i SS EET TTA UE FXO Trunk 2 Click the Add icon in the FXO Trunk section to open the following screen Enter the name of the group PSTN1 in this example and click Apply Note the Machine ID field this is a name automatically assigned to the X6004 In some web configurator screens the outbound line group is identified in the following format Machine ID Group Name so in our example it is IPPBX 01 PSTNI Figure 26 Add FXO Trunk Outbound Line Group FXO Interface Machine ID IPPBX oot 7 Group Name sri Description 3 The new outbound line group displays in the following screen Now you will add the FXO connections to the outbound line group Click the outbound line group s Advanced icon Figure 27 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group Outbound
249. in the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products X6004 User s Guide Appendix C Legal Information X6004 User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information ee p Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel
250. inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Version 1 1 Copyright c 1999 2003 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the
251. ing Static ROUIC eee 90 mula a SAE ROWE e 91 Parn I IP PBA eT 93 Chapter 7 eae a E E E E T EN O E E E A A E E E 95 TA SIP Somer Cs Ne ial acai ak atin tepidis indad ef en Ea aba Tinie eil aN idu dd 95 RE IE diearedias 95 Ta aP Seer qe cbe SSMS as uINES 96 Fad Fe NN e 97 foe CONGUE FXO SOUINGS MG 97 Dg LOTR FXS SONGS ets iicet iraani pe Polis bias EENAA A EEEN NSS EENAA ER ATAQUE teed 98 propeller 99 PAA CN DECKE eec 99 Ta STUN FENO 250i dete MC M Raa EIEE a EEN EAAS EEA EEEN AASER 100 Chapter 8 Auto Provisio siinne E EARE 103 M Auto PROVISIONING OVGIRMIGW 103 8 1 1 How to Configure Auto Provisioning uius kia kie Eje kiki ci hn Ec 103 Nes plnuSgccicreoRulc cmeem c ULT 104 Da AUG PIOVISIGD OCDE aaxesnbateciila n aded ndi dH DR OR Y HG RR RI en d do Ron XH ua d RR 104 8 2 1 Auto Provision Edit Settings uana erp ege npn ed dax na E RB a Ka hu ad 105 8 2 2 Auto Provision View SPIGEN 12r rii ttr atue inopes tuat iot is Ioui Ia br EA 106 Chapter 9 QOS 107 CNN Ces uos Fm c ER 107 CNN pm ree mre re eee ren renee eer tre ree EE 107 hail rd oan 94 108 X6004 User s Guide 13 Table of Contents 9 1 3 DSCP and PeedHop BelaViar usse rode
252. ing you to choose from one of four classes of forwarding assurance Each class has three choices of drop precedence to choose from When congestion occurs the DS nodes on your network treat all IP packets marked with the same class and drop precedence identically DS nodes can be configured to protect packets with lower drop precedence value by discarding packets with a higher drop precedence value Expedited Forwarding EF The EF PHB defines a single DSCP designed for simulating a private end to end pipeline across a DiffServ network IP packets are marked for high priority low loss low latency low jitter assured bandwidth end to end service through DS domains This is recommended for use with VoIP traffic as it addresses the factors that cause degradation in sound quality Class Selector CS IP packets are marked with values partially backwards compatible with known current uses of IP precedence field The packets marked with higher values are given higher priority than those with lower values 9 2 QoS Settings Use this screen to set up the QoS settings on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt QoS X6004 User s Guide Chapter 9 QoS Figure 92 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt QoS TOS minimize delay v Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 26 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt QoS
253. ion This field can be left blank Apply Click Apply to save your changes Back to Peer List Click Back to Peer List to go back to Authority Group configuration page without saving your changes 14 3 4 SIP Extension Call Forward Screen Use this screen to set up call forwarding and call blocking rules for your extension BES The X6004 checks any system wide call forwarding see Chapter 19 on page 175 and call blocking see Section 7 4 on page 99 settings before applying any of the rules created for individual extensions To access this screen click the Call Forward tab in any of the SIP extension configuration screens Figure 110 SIP Extension Call Forward Office Hours Blind Forward Busy Forward Black list ID Call Forward Call Forward Setting Oftice Hours Iv sun M Mon M Tue M wed M Thu M Fri M sat Time 00 00 oo oo DND Do Not Disturb Disable C Enable White List b C voice Mail No Answer Forward C Disable Enable Find Me List b C Voice Mail After Office Hours Call Blocking Setting Block the calls without Caller Disable Enable Extension Number voice Mail Disable C Enable Extension Numbers C voice Mail Disable C Enable Extension Number voice Mail Disable Enable BlackList p Disable C Enable Apply Back to Peer List X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Each field is describ
254. ion changes Advanced This icon takes you to the main configuration screen of most ea features Ti Delete Use this icon to remove components such as extensions or groups Auto Attendant This screen takes you to a screen where you can select an auto at attendant c Reboot This icon reboots the X6004 or another member of a ZyStack if configured Up This icon is used to move items higher in priority y Down This icon is used to move items lower in priority X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator Table 11 Icon Explanation Table continued ICON NAME DESCRIPTION or Left Use this icon to move selected items from right to left in a z screen or Right Use this icon to move selected items from left to right in a gt i screen 5 7 Resetting the X6004 If you forget the administrator password you will need to reset the X6004 back to the factory defaults Use the RESET button on the front panel of the X6004 to reset the X6004 back to factory defaults Press and hold the RESET button for 10 seconds The X6004 will reload its factory defaults The X6004 is reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default administrator username admin and password 1234 The LAN IP address of the X6004 also reverts to the default 192 168 1 12 and the WAN IP address reverts to 172 16 1 1 5 8 Rebooting the X6004 If the X6004 is not performing as expected you can reb
255. ion via the X6004 and conference calls on the X6004 Consider the following when making decisions on how to assign the DSP channels on the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 12 DSP Management A typical conversation uses two channels A conference call uses one channel per participant Unassigned DSP channels are shared between conference calls and SIP connections 12 2 1 DSP Management Screen Use this screen to manage the DSP channels available on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt DSP Management Figure 101 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt DSP Management DSP Management Configuration Total available FXO FXS SIP trunk Conference Share Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 32 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt DSP Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Attributes This column displays which features use the DSP channels on the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured each column identifies a single X6004 in the ZyStack Total available The X6004 automatically detects the total available DSP channels available on the X6004 and displays them in this field This value is based on the DSP modules you have installed on the X6004 FXO This field displays the total DSP channels assigned to the FXO ports on the X6004 The X6004 automatically assigns one DSP channel per F
256. ions 195 group pickup 155 adding and editing 156 example 155 H hard drive 35 283 help web configurator 84 how it works overview 37 HTML based phone 265 272 HTTP 103 HTTPS 255 humidity 283 hunt group 149 and night service 150 and office hours 150 fewest calls 150 least recent 150 random 150 ring algorithm 150 ring all 150 round robin 150 hunt groups 145 IANA 294 inbound calls and auto attendant 175 176 Interactive Voice Response see IVR 275 interfaces 283 for ZyStack 209 internal call routing 42 internal calls 39 internal extension length 160 internal telephone network 34 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 294 Internet Telephony Service Provider see ITSP 33 introduction 33 IP address defaults 284 IP network 34 IP PBX 33 IP telephones 34 42 and auto provisioning 46 deployment 45 ISP DNS servers 86 ITSP 37 163 ITSP Internet Telephony Service Provider 33 IVR accessing 275 and extensions 275 authentication 275 call forward and blacklist 277 overview of functions 276 personal 275 PIN menu 276 X6004 User s Guide Index voicemail 279 IVR Interactive Voice Response 275 L LCR 39 add dial condition 188 advanced setup 39 and authority group 54 61 and dial conditions 185 and dialing conditions 38 and Outbound Line Groups 38 and outbound line groups 185 associations 185 associations example 186 basic setup 39 components 185 components example 185 configuration 187 d
257. ious screen without saving your changes 19 4 2 Auto Attendant Menu Settings Use this screen to edit auto attendant menu settings Click the Advanced icon in the Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Auto Attendant screen to view a screen as shown next X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant Only the screen for the initial auto attendant menu is shown In the sub menu screens some of the fields are not available Figure 163 Auto Attendant Menu Settings Auto Attendant Audio File Upload Audio File State Options Auto Attendant Office Hour NewAA Dial Extension Number Forward to a specific extension directly Extension lt lt T TE Desc Tipi ion Acio Extension UG 111 Forward to next menu Next Menu EP OI 333 Forward to an extension 4444 EP Ww 22 Forward to an extension 111 EP I Browse Unload Uploaded Playback Enable C Disable Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 74 Auto Attendant Menu Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Attendant Office Hour Auto Attendant Name This field identifies which auto attendant settings you are configuring Audio File Upload Enter the location of the file you want to upload or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want to upload Upload Click this to upload an audio file for this menu o
258. is a list of phone numbers from which the X6004 will block calls to your extension To access this screen click the Black List button in the Forward Block screen Figure 229 Forward Block gt Black List Voice Mail ZyxEL G amp KS Peer Info Forward Block Black List Number Add Apply Cancel wy Web Phone Each field is described in the following table Table 130 Forward Block gt Black List LABEL DESCRIPTION Number Enter the telephone number you want to block from calling you when you enable call blocking Click Add and the number you entered displays in the field below Delete Highlight an existing Black List number and click the Delete icon to remove it from the list Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to return to Forward Block screen 32 5 Voice Mail Settings Use this screen to set up the voice mail settings for your extension To access this screen click the Voice Mail tab in the web portal Figure 230 Voice Mail D Forward Block vt Voice Mail ZyXEL G8 Peer Info Voice Mail Setting Received E mail Address attached Voice File IT Delete Voice Message After Mailed Apply Reset wy Web Phone X6004 User s Guide 271 Chapter 32 Web Portal Each field is described in the following table Table 131 Voice Mail LABEL DESCRIPT
259. ist see Section 14 3 7 on page 138 button to configure phone numbers that you want to block from calling you Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Block the calls without Caller ID Select Enable and the X6004 will block all incoming calls from phone that do not send caller ID Apply Click this to save your changes Back to Peer List Click this to go back to the Authority Group configuration screen without saving your changes X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group 14 3 5 DND White List Use this screen to edit the DND White List for your extension This is a list of extensions that the X6004 will forward calls from even if you have DND enabled To access this screen click the DND White List button in the Call Forward screen Figure 111 DND White List DND White List Number Add Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 44 DND White List LABEL DESCRIPTION Number Enter the telephone number you want to allow to call you even if you DND turned on Click Add and the number you entered displays in the field below Delete Highlight an existing DND White List number and click the Delete icon to remove it from the list Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to return to the Call Forward screen 14 3 6 Find Me List Use this screen to edit the Find Me List for your extension
260. ithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or
261. ition TrustedPeer 01 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 20 LCR 20 2 LCR List When an LCR contains more than one outbound line group as in the LCR1 example the administrator can prioritize the outbound line groups in the LCR When a call is made using an LCR with multiple outbound line groups the X6004 tries to use the higher priority outbound line group first and if the line is not available then it tries a lower priority outbound line group The following figure shows a possible assignment of LCRs to authority groups In our example the Sales authority group has been associated with both LCR1 and LCR2 so extensions that are part of Sales can use any outbound line group they choose The second authority group Research only has LCR1 assigned to it so extensions that are part of Research can not use outbound line group ITSP Figure 167 LCR Components Example Research PSTN Dial Condition 01 TrustedPeer Use this screen to view outbound dialing rules LCRs configured on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR Figure 168 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR Delete Q Add E Edit Delete m ezout easy to call out g loi E local call local call LCR BP du E long distance call long distance call LCR EP dul E international call international call LCR E imi r OutRulei Rule for PSTN B tuj C SIP1 SIP
262. ity group You can however stop extensions within one authority group from calling extensions in another authority group An example is shown below You have an organization with three authority groups AG1 AG3 You can remove the link from one authority group for example AG3 to another authority group for example AG2 to stop extensions in AG3 from calling AG2 Figure 171 Group Management Authority Group to Authority Group a AG2 Ss Research KS ENG AG3 Consultants X6004 User s Guide Chapter 21 Group Management LCRs LCR is the outbound dialing rule When you create links from an authority group to an LCR you allow the extensions in that authority group to make outbound calls via the outbound line groups configured in the LCR The following figure shows AGI which is an authority group for the sales department associated with LCRI this could be an LCR for calls via your local telephone service provider PSTN and calls via a link to your branch office TrustedPeer and LCR2 this could be an LCR for long distance calls via your VoIP service provider ITSP AG2 is associated with LCRI only In this case extensions belonging to AGI can make calls via all outbound line groups whereas extensions in AG2 are limited to calls to your local telephone company and your branch office Figure 172 Group Management Authority Group to LCR A Research z Internet J Ring Groups When you create links f
263. ke a call via a specific FXO trunk or dial 1 for calls via a SIP trunk LCRs also set priority to which outbound line group should be tried first second third and so on when making outbound calls with the same dialing condition Auto Attendant This is a feature which routes incoming calls to their proper extension An auto attendant is assigned to each outbound line group and it services incoming calls on those lines If your organization has two outbound line groups each with a specific telephone number for incoming calls then you can assign a different auto attendant for each incoming line Assign one auto attendant for general calls to the extensions in your organization for example AAT and one auto attendant for direct routing to a FAX machine for example FAX Figure 6 Auto Attendant Please dial the extension you would like to reach 555 0002 555 0001 R 2001 100 1002 1003 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 2 How It Works 2 2 Internal Call Routing Internal call routing refers to calls between extensions on the X6004 People simply dial the extension they want to call The X6004 checks to see if the number dialed is an existing extension and forwards the call to that extension The X6004 by default allows people with extensions from one authority group to call extensions in another authority group You can however block calls between authority groups if your organization requires such a setting The
264. l Disable C Enable Extension Number voice Mail Disable C Enable Black List p Disable C Enable Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 127 Forward Block LABEL DESCRIPTION Call Forward Use this section to configure call forwarding settings for your extension Setting Office Hours The X6004 has separate rules for call forwarding during office hours than after office hours The time you configure specifies the office hours for this extension and affects call forwarding during those office hours Office Hours Specify the days of the week you want to configure as working days for this extension Time Specify the time range in 24 hour format for the office hours DND Do Not Select Enable and the X6004 will not forward calls to your extension Click on Disturb White List to configure telephone numbers which ignore whether you have DND turned on or off See Section 32 4 1 on page 269 Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Blind Forward Select Enable and specify an extension The X6004 will forward all incoming calls to that extension Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Busy Forward Select Enable and specify an extension The X6004 will forward all in
265. l to ITSP 3 3 1 Connecting to ITSP The following section introduces how to configure a connection to the ITSP This example assumes that the X6004 has a network connection to the SIP server at your ITSP The following figure shows the network configuration used in this example X6004 User s Guide 55 Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 39 Network Connection to ITSP 127 23 37 22 WAN The following table describes our sample account information as provided by the ITSP Table 3 Sample VoIP Account Information INFO VALUES INFO VALUES SIP Number 5551122 SIP Service Domain 127 23 37 22 SIP Server Address 127 23 37 22 DTMF Mode SIP INFO SIP Server Port 5060 SIP Username 5551122 Register Server 127 23 37 22 SIP Password 1234 Address Register Server Port 5060 Codecs supported G 726 G 729A Procedure 1 Inthe web configurator click Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group to open the following screen Figure 40 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt Outbound Line Group Outbound Line Group FXO Trunk Wadd AP Advanced amp Edit fl Delete A auto attendant SIP Trunk SA machine croupName Descrstion NN COUNN Trusted Peer aS eT a ac 2 Click the Add icon in the SIP Trunk section to open the following screen Enter the name of the group ITSPI in this example and click Apply Note the Machine ID fiel
266. lave member of the ZyStack WAN MAC This field displays the MAC address of the WAN interface of this X6004 LAN MAC This field displays the MAC address of the LAN interface of this X6004 Set Click Set to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes Reset Click this to reset the screen to the last saved configuration 23 3 ZyStack Internal Call Routing When an IP phone is a SIP client of one X6004 A in the figure and it calls a telephone that is a SIP client of another X6004 B in the figure The default behavior of the X6004 A is to process the call and connect it to the X6004 B on which the SIP client is configured This telephone call is illustrated by the solid line in the following figure Note that the processing resources of both X6004s are being utilized throughout the duration of the call The X6004s can handle internal calls more efficiently 1f you specify the local subnets which can connect to other ZyStack members The dotted line shows the same phone call after it has been redirected to X6004 B In this scenario the subnet 192 168 1 0 24 was configured as a local subnet When A receives a call from a SIP client that matches the local subnet and the destination of the client s request is a phone connected to another X6004 B it then redirects the call to B Figure 192 Internal Call Routing 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 2 A 192 168 1 101 r C
267. le 25 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Provisioning These settings apply to the phone number extension you specified in the Auto Setting Provision screen MAC Address Specify the MAC address of the ZyXEL device that receives configuration settings from the X6004 for this extension This field is left blank for extensions assigned to software based IP phones Serial No Specify the serial number of the software based IP phone that receives configuration settings from the X6004 for this extension This field is left blank for extensions assigned to hardware based IP phones X6004 User s Guide Chapter 8 Auto Provision Table 25 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Provision Active Choose On if you want to activate auto provisioning for this extension or choose Off if you want to deactivate auto provisioning for this extension Auto Provision Interval Time Specify the amount of time in seconds that the X6004 waits between sending configuration settings to the ZyXEL device Auto Provision Delay Time Specify the time the X6004 waits before sending a configuration file to a ZyXEL device that requested it The delay time is used by the X6004 to space out sending auto provisioning files to multiple clients which request auto provisioning files at the same time
268. lect this feature if you want complete voice messages to be sent to the e mail address you specified in the Received E mail Address field Delete Voice Mail After Mailed Check this box to delete voicemail messages stored on the X6004 after they have been e mailed Apply Click this to save your changes Back to Peer List Click this to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 14 3 9 SIP Extension Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure advanced settings for this extension Click the Advanced tab in any of the SIP extension configuration screen to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Figure 115 SIP Extension Advanced Screen CODEC Setting Extra Setting DTMF Mode MWI Mode M Group Pickup H 264 pass through info Apply Back to Peer List Each field is described in the following table Table 48 SIP Extension Advanced Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Codec Setting Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want this extension to use when communicating with the X6004 See Section 14 1 1 on page 126 for more information on voice codecs The following codecs shown in highest quality to lowest quality order are supported by the X6004 information on voice codecs The following codecs are supported by the X6004 G 711A typically used in Europe G 711 typically used in North Ameri
269. lephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain X6004 User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 3 1 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK X6004 User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support X6004 User s Guide Index A accounts types 245 administrator account change password 245 administrator accounts 245 add
270. li Eme od rbibate edm epn e finn fus 267 Figure 220 FON ard BIOGR A S 268 Figure 227 Forward Block gt DND White LIBE scisssistaaavissenanecessstaacveusstadeswuussensacchsssnpaceedaenmeaensistaaaconissnes 269 Figure 226 Forward Block gt Find Me Liat i i tein e trao aia ai 270 Figure 220 Forward Block Black LISI ausis ede oic oco dos aga co adno o dosi des 271 E 20 Wola PAIN MC 271 Figure 231 Wen FONE 272 Pe Ue See Srna gli KE DP 276 Foe 255 thc Fs one c 276 Figure 234 IVR Call Forward amp Blacklist 1i cess artic da ee a Rad de ea vans oc sarees e Eat 278 zgfrcesWpuctbgsr o MMC T 279 Figure 236 Network Number and Host ID 1 iiosesecei erit re roni tet rbe enana e aaa 288 Figure 237 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting 1 ret th rr eot ne 290 Figure 239 Subnetting Example Alter Subnetting sic edad re Eti a E42 EPRR YER HERE PH e EEEMA Peek epe Peer Rev ae da inda 291 Figure 239 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example cessisse enne theta 295 Figure 240 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example sse 295 Figure 241 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example s sss 296 X6004 User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables pr Te EET 36 Table 2 Tutorials OvVernieW EM LC 41 Tabled Sample VolF Jeoounb IDPOiallWk seisine n kenana inaia Ee CE akne EE 56
271. lk to a sales representative customer service representative or the operator Once the caller reaches the Sales menu the auto attendant can prompt them to specify which product they are interested in The caller then dials a number to reach the appropriate sales representative Figure 154 Auto Attendant Custom Structure 10015 1002 A 1003 QS 1004 amp s Incoming Call 1005 GSS 1006 Gs 1007 S Customer Service Operator 19 2 1 Configuring Menus Configuring an auto attendant requires you to set up menus In Figure 154 on page 176 there are three menus The Home Menu and two sub menus Sales and Customer Service Each menu should have an accompanying audio file which informs the callers of their options In each menu you can allow or disallow the dialing of extensions You can also assign the following options to each menu based on the action performed by the caller Each option is followed by example content for the accompanying audio file Directa call to an extension Dial 1 to reach the operator Direct a caller to the next menu Dial 2 to reach the sales department Allow the caller to listen to the current menu again Dial 3 to listen to this menu again Allow the caller to go back to the previous menu Dial 4 to go back to the previous menu Not available for the first menu X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant The caller dials the number specified in the prompt to navi
272. ll 199 modules supported 283 DSP Digital Signal Processing 35 dynamic DNS 87 wildcard 88 www dyndns org 87 E emergency call configuration 198 overview 198 expansion slots supported 283 Expat License 303 extensions 33 37 39 42 and pickup groups 155 and web portal 265 configuring length 160 for analog phones 37 FXS 37 SIP 37 external lines 163 F failover 207 standby mode 208 FAX 175 fax machine 38 FCC interference statement 317 feature codes 62 example 62 voicemail 63 feature codes tutorial 62 X6004 User s Guide Index file transfer using FTP command example 256 file types 256 filename convention configuration configuration file names 256 find me list 267 270 firmware 255 file types 256 FTP example 256 firmware specifications 284 Foreign Exchange Office FXO 38 Foreign Exchange Subscriber see FXS 37 FTP 256 example firmware upgrade 256 full admin 245 FXO Foreign Exchange Office Trunk 38 FXO and FXS relationship 38 FXO interface cards 38 49 FXO ports 38 49 FXO trunk 38 50 163 adding and editing 165 and auto attendant 166 configuration 164 status 225 FXS Foreign Exchange Subscriber Extensions 37 FXS and FXO relationship 38 FXS extensions status 224 FXS interface card 37 FXS peer status 224 FXS ports 37 G General Pubic License GNU 297 getting help 84 GNU General Public License 297 group management 191 194 and page group example 153 associat
273. lling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above pro
274. lls and compare them against the extensions on the X6004 Match Digit s Specify how many digits the X6004 should inspect and compare against the extensions configured on the X6004 Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go to the Auto Attendant screen without saving your changes 18 6 Trusted Peer Configuration Trusted peers refer to connections to another SIP server for example another X6004 that has configured your X6004 as a trusted peer Your organization may want to use trusted peer connections between remote branch offices 18 6 1 Add Edit Trusted Peer The screens for editing or adding trusted peers on the X6004 contain the same fields Only the screen used to add a trusted peer is shown below Click the Add or Edit icon in the Trusted Peer section of the Outbound Line Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown Figure 150 Add Edit Trusted Peer Outbound Line Group Trusted Peer Machine ID IPPBX 001 7 Group Name Description Apply Back to Outbound Group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group Each field is described in the following table Table 70 Add Edit Trusted Peer LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID Select the ID of the X6004 on which you want to configure the trusted peer This is an internal name not configurable of the X6004 Only one choice is shown if you have not configured ZyStack This field is not available w
275. local calls via the outbound line group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 2 How It Works Figure 8 Outbound Call Routing Advanced LCR Local LCR Long Distance LCR Local The configuration requirement for setting up outbound call routing are 1 Create an authority group Create extensions in the authority group Create an outbound line group Create LCRs and add outbound line groups to them Associate LCRs to authority groups a BR WN X6004 User s Guide Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the X6004 Specifically the tutorials will show you how to set up the X6004 for a telephone network as shown in the following figure Figure9 Tutorial Overview The tutorials include Table2 Tutorials Overview TUTORIAL GOAL STEPS Making Internal Calls Configure SIP Extensions Connect IP Phones Register IP Phones Auto Provisioning Making PSTN Calls Connecting to PSTN e Dialing Rule for PSTN e LCR to Authority Group Assignment Making ITSP Calls Connecting to ITSP e Dialing Rule for ITSP e LCR to Authority Group Assignment Using Call Features Customizing Feature Codes Using the Voicemail Feature X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials BS This chapter assumes that you have already configured your network settings See the Network Wizard section in the QSG or Chapter 6 on page 85 for more
276. lorer User Prompt x Script Prompt Input new prefix number Cancel The prefix is what allows callers to simply dial the well known emergency number for their region For example in the United States the emergency number is 911 so you want users to simply dial 911 in case of an emergency Since extensions usually have to dial a prefix to dial out via the X6004 this might make it confusing for callers within your organization Type the prefix number necessary to connect users to an emergency number by simply dialing the emergency number you configure in the Emergency Number section of this screen Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value Emergency Use this section to add edit or remove emergency numbers Numbers Delete Select this checkbox and click Delete to remove this emergency number from the X6004 Emergency This column displays the emergency numbers currently configured on the X6004 Numbers Add Edit Delete Use the Add icon to configure a new emergency number A window opens up and prompts you to enter the emergency number Use the Edit icon to change an existing emergency number A window opens up and prompts you to change the emergency number Explorer User Prompt x Script Prompt Input new emergency number Cancel 911 Use the Delete icon to remove an existing eme
277. ly access voicemail by pressing the VOICE MAIL button located on its keypad This is done by typing the call feature number into the Voice Mail Number field Figure 54 ZyXEL V300 Voicemail Configuration SIP Settings SIP Settings SIP Account IV Active Number SIP Local Port SIP Server Address SIP Server Port REGISTER Server Address REGISTER Server Port SIP Service Domains M Send Caller ID Voice Mail Number DNS SRY EI EXAMPLE ot o 5060 1024 65535 e060 1024 65535 e060 1024 65535 001 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials X6004 User s Guide Phone User Tutorial 4 1 Using Your Web Portal Every phone user has a personal web portal on the X6004 You can log in and make changes to your account setup and IP phone users also use the web phone The web phone is just like the telephone you usually use to make calls from this extension you can call all the same numbers in the same way The following sections show examples of how to access the X6004 s web portal configure your own personal settings and use the web phone 4 1 1 Your Information In this example your network administrator has given you some information as shown in the following table You can also use this table to note down your own personal information if you like Table 4 Your Information EXAMPLE INFORMATION YOUR INFORMATION Extension Number 1001 PIN Code 5678 Web Portal IP
278. m number of participants join this conference call the conference room will be closed until an existing participant leaves the conference room If you allow too many participants into a single conference room you may use up all of the DSP resources on the X6004 and callers will not be able to make calls PIN Number Type the numeric password callers need to enter to join a conference room If this field is left blank then callers can enter this conference room without entering a PIN Confirm PIN Retype the PIN Number Description Enter a brief description to identify this conference room Add Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services 22 4 Music on Hold Overview The X6004 allows you to specify a music file to play when callers are placed on hold This lets the callers know that they are still connected Use the following guidelines for the music file Table 86 Music on Hold File Guidelines SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Format The music file must be a G 711 format audio file wav y law Size The music file should be less than 100 Kb in size The X6004 will play the file in a loop 22 4 1 Music on Hold Management Use this screen to upload an audio file to the X6004 This file 1s played when callers are placed on hold You can also specify for the
279. mponents compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the
280. ms or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If t
281. n 3 PIN Code Enter Administrator Username and Password then click Login Username M Password max 30 alphanumeric printable characters and no spaces a Note Please turn on the Javascript and ActiveX control setting on Internet Explorer and trun off the block popup window application Login Reset 32 3 Account Settings Use this screen to manage the passwords associated with your extension To access this screen click Peer info in the web portal This is also the first screen you see when you login to the web portal LES Some of the fields are not applicable for FXS extensions and do not display when analog phone users log into the personal web portal X6004 User s Guide Chapter 32 Web Portal Figure 225 Peer Info ZyXEL W gt 9 qv Peer Info Forward Block Voice Mail Web Phone SIP Peer 1001 configuration and information Group Sales SIP Auth User Name 1001 SIP Auth Password e Confirm pe 5 Web IVR VM PIN Code e Confirm pe 5 Each field is described in the following table Table 126 Peer Info LABEL DESCRIPTION Group This is a read only field showing the authority group this extension belongs to SIP Auth User This is a read only field showing the SIP user name associated with this Name extension This field is not available for FXS extensions on the X6004 SIP Auth Use these fields to change the SIP password associated with this extension
282. n The X6004 will forward all incoming calls to that extension when your phone is off the hook For FXS analog phones extensions incoming calls are put into a call waiting queue Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension No Answer Forward Select Enable and the X6004 will forward all incoming calls to the extensions you specify when you do not answer the phone within the default ring time The default ring time is configured in the Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Global Set screen Click Find Me List see Section 14 3 6 on page 137 to specify a list of extensions that the X6004 will forward incoming calls to Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension After Office Hours These fields specify how to treat calls to your extension that occur after office hours Select Enable and specify an extension The X6004 will forward all incoming calls to that extension Select Voice Mail and the X6004 will forward calls directly to voice mail Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Call Blocking Use this section to configure call blocking settings for your extension Setting Black List Select Enable and the X6004 will block all incoming calls from extensions that you specify as blacklisted Click the Black L
283. n do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a unique IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 239 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example d a A N o a XL i s E 192 168 1 33 A amp F cS i Internet li I J il i li s W I REEN I E 192 168 133 LI a 4 Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the rou
284. n gt SIP Server Figure 83 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Global Set Global Codec G723 1 IP PBX Global setting SIP Server Realm Name default Port 5060 Default SIP Client fo Registration Expiration BU 1 86400 Sec RTP Port Range 10000 e 20000 Default Ring Time 20 1 300 Sec Disable Enable Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 18 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Global Set LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Server Realm Arealm is a set of usernames and passwords used by SIP client devices to Name authenticate with a SIP server The X6004 supports a single realm When SIP clients register with the X6004 they must provide the name of the realm they belong to as well as the username and password Type the realm name which the extensions that register with the X6004 must provide for authentication Port Enter the X6004 s listening port number or keep the default value This is the port number your SIP clients need to use to register with the X6004 Default SIP Client Registration Expiration The X6004 is a SIP registrar server A SIP registrar server maintains a database of SIP identity to IP address or domain name mapping The X6004 checks your username password and realm when you register Enter the number of seconds SIP clients are registered with the X6004 before thei
285. n anna aun 225 Figure 200 Monitor gt Status Observation gt FXO Trunk eeeeeesseeseesesesnnnr ninth anna tnn nna ntn 226 Figure 201 Monitor gt Status Observation gt SIP TTUDK i ieceee cetero te ttt td erac pto tt kt d de naia 227 Figure 202 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View LOQ 1 hne rn nane rn nonna tna rne aaa anda 230 Figure 203 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log Show Filter c cssccccceeeseccecereeeeeceeeeeeeeeaee 231 Figure 204 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting csissccascssisecanvsesecauevssenecasrcsumacssesennacenersawene 232 Figure 205 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Active Log Summary ssss 233 Figure 206 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Internal Log sssssssse 234 Figure 207 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting gt Edit Remote Log ssssss 236 Figure 208 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt Management c ccccceeeeeccceeeeeeececeereeeeeeeaeneneeaeeeenneeeeacanneneee 240 Figure 209 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt Bap EISE sc deccisicsiscscrancidsestscicaisctnizubacees CERA E PAS FREE Fa rU sa pur EF asks 241 X6004 User s Guide 25 List of Figures Figure 210 Report LOGS COR gt CDR GUBE cmraccisxs pott Mdh tik Nenn FI ata dS hath rtt 242 Figure 211 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt CDR Query gt Report 1 uuseeeeecu sena rn
286. n collect the following information from the X6004 Current status information the X6004 executes debugging commands and saves the results in a compressed file You can then submit the results to a service technician or view some of the results via a spreadsheet application for example Excel or WordPad See the Command Reference Guide for more information regarding the commands executed to collect current status information The resulting file can be uncompressed with data compression utilities for example WinRAR The resulting uncompressed files are diag ezsh dbg contains the results of executing diagnostic and debug log commands on the X6004 This file can be opened using a spreadsheet application such as Excel or a text editor like WordPad system bin contains encrypted information which can only be diagnosed by a service engineer Customer support may ask you to submit this file for diagnostic purposes e Network traffic information the X6004 logs traffic passing through its interfaces You can specify the interface protocol or a specific host to capture the traffic from The logs are saved in a Generic Network Capture Document cap file extension and can be viewed via a network analyzer such as Ethereal These files can diagnose communication problems between the X6004 and other network devices A service technician may ask you to perform a packet capture when troubleshooting connectivity problems on your network 29 1
287. n get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there 1s no warranty for this free software If the software 1s modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent thi
288. n to use when communicating with the X6004 See Section 14 1 1 on page 126 for more information on voice codecs The following codecs are supported by the X6004 G 711A typically used in Europe G 711 typically used in North America and Japan G 729A G 722 G 722 2 G 723 1 you must activate support for this codec in the Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server screen G726 When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec If these SIP extensions are assigned to videophones you must specify the video codecs used for video calls The X6004 allows the following video codecs to passthrough H 261 H 263 H 264 MP4 See Section 14 1 2 on page 127 for more information on video codecs Codec Pool This column indicates the codec types not used for these extensions You can add a codec type to be used for these extensions by highlighting it and clicking the Right button Codec List This column indicates the codec types used by these extensions You can organize the priority of the codecs by highlighting it and clicking the Up or Down buttons to move the codec higher or lower in priority The SIP extensions attempt to use the higher priority codecs first and try the lower priority codecs next You can remove a codec type from being used from these extension by highlighting it and hitting the Left button X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group
289. ne switchboard 1s an example of a PBX The company s telephones are connected to the IP PBX The IP PBX is then connected to the outside world via a connection to a traditional Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN or a broadband Internet connection to an Internet Telephony Service Provider ITSP Each telephone connected to an IP PBX has an extension assigned to it An extension is a unique telephone number within an organization typically consisting of only a few digits People inside the company can call each other by dialing extensions Calls to the outside world go through the IP PBX to the PSTN or ITSP Figure1 IP PBX Example Internet D Midi The X6004 can function as a stand alone telephone switchboard for a small organization It can also supplement a legacy PBX within an organization by providing VoIP telephony features X6004 User s Guide 33 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your X6004 1 1 1 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Implementation The X6004 uses SIP Session Initiation Protocol to communicate with other SIP devices SIP is an internationally recognized standard for implementing Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP The following figure shows SIP devices communicating with the X6004 A IP Phones Telephones that convert voice into IP packets and vice versa for example ZyXEL s V 500 B Softphones Software based phones installed on PCs C VoIP Gateways Devices for example ZyXEL s P
290. nings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The X6004 may be referred to as the X6004 the device or the system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke 1s denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a Shorthand for for instance and e means that is or in other words X6004 User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figure
291. ny previously stored local phonebook entries Click Cancel if you don t want to save this phonebook to the X6004 See Section 11 3 1 on page 117 for information on the individual fields in the local phonebook entries 11 3 LDAP Phonebook Screen Use this screen to map the values associated with the account entries on the LDAP server to the phonebook values stored on the X6004 You can also view the LDAP phonebook entries and configure how often the X6004 updates the LDAP phonebook from the LDAP server To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt LDAP Phonebook X6004 User s Guide Chapter 11 Phonebook Figure 96 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt LDAP Phonebook LDAP Phonebook name aisplayName ext ielephoneNumhber e mail mail country c logon name userPrincipalName home homePhone Modify mobile mobile department department Default Latest Update Fri 29 Sep 2006 13 25 53 0800 I Regular update ado o everyday Set Refresh Each field is described in the following table Table 29 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Phonebook gt LDAP Phonebook LABEL DESCRIPTION name Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the name field of the LDAP phonebook to e mail Specify the field name in the LDAP database that you want to map the e ma
292. o distinguish between numbers when trying to dial a PSTN phone number You should use the same mode as your VoIP service provider The choices are rfc2833 Follow the RFC 2833 standard and send the DTMF tones in RTP packets inband Send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 can distort the tones info Send the DTMF tones in SIP messages MWI Mode Check this box to enable Message Waiting Indicator MWI mode for this extension The X6004 sends a beeping tone to the IP phone when there is at least one voicemail for this extension Group Pickup Check this box if you want to enable the group pickup feature for this extension If this extension is added to a pickup group then the phone at this extension rings when any extension that is part of this pickup group is called See Chapter 16 on page 155 for more information on group pickup Apply Click this to save your changes Back to Peer List Click this to go back to the Authority Group configuration screen without saving your changes 14 3 10 Add an FXS Extension Use this screen to add an FXS extension to an authority group on the X6004 To access this screen click the Add icon in the Authority Group configuration screen Figure 116 Add an FXS Extension Authority Group Basic Setting Extension Number Inte
293. o save the outbound line group in the LCR and then click the Add icon to configure a dial condition 52 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 33 local call LCR LCR List LCR Item LCR Data LCR Name local call Description loscal CR Max Call Time z sec P ENT IPPBX O01 ITSP1 ca IPPBX 001 PSTN1 Outbound line group a Cae Domen Dial Condition List Delete Gi add B Edit fil Delete PIE S Delete 3 The Dial Condition screen appears as shown Type 0 followed by a period in the Dial Condition field This means that this LCR will be used when callers dial any number that begins with a 0 The period is a wildcard character meaning anything can follow the zero Test the dial condition In our example we tested the number 05555555 to see if it matches our dial condition You can test any number by typing it in the Number Pattern Test field and clicking the Right icon an O appears if the number typed in matches the dial condition and an X appears if it does not match the dial condition Specify an offset value In our example we configure an offset value of 1 The offset value tells the X6004 how many initial digits if any it should strip off of the dialed number before routing the call to the external line See Figure 37 on page 55 for an example Click Apply to save your settings Figure 34 Dial Condition for local call
294. of a power failure on the X6004 Hard Drive Support One hard drive slot for an 80 GB hard drive installation DSP Module Support The system comes with a built in 32 channel DSP channel and has 2 slots for additional DSP modules Contact your vendor for DSP modules suitable for the X6004 LEDs BPS PWR SYS ALM HDD Per LAN WAN port 10 100 Per FXO FXS interface card Sys Port 1 4 Operating Environment Temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 30 C 60 C 13 F 158 F Humidity 20 90 non condensing Power Wire Gauge 18AWGX3C Fuse Specification 250 VAC T4A X6004 User s Guide Chapter 34 Product Specifications Table 134 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address Subnet Mask LAN 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 WAN 172 16 1 1 255 255 255 0 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User Name admin Default Password 1234 Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the X6004 SIP Server The X6004 performs SIP proxy registrar and redirect server functions Auto Provisioning The X6004 can send auto configuration files to ZyXEL IP phones Qos The X6004 can mark outgoing VoIP frames with DiffServ code point values ToS priority
295. oice Response IVR System a ecccunkn ec obiecti orit ARERRERINERREE EH DA Qe inn IN eEEE RUM Ne E RUMUE 275 POPC PS S aici sedis LT 281 xistle ceri e METTE E OE 283 X6004 User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Vs rs cnl toe m 3 rere dr pid n E 4 Safety rl ce E S 6 CONSE COVE POW PR A 9 Table of COMENS M 11 kistor ROU O Son a a a 21 Hst of Tables Me 27 Part I Introduction and Tutorials sus 31 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your AG004 i scsciiesicsnncoscassasnarcasacancavensnnnmanavanina vacua NR NR NT KXu va RR o Rar S PXA RAER 33 T DONE eaaa odo e aca pe Dd eodd t dod feet o sm aU Combe scr 33 1 1 1 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Implementation ccsseceeceeeseeeeeeeeenseeeees 34 TZ FEX Telephony TOU GS 111555 knpc nnd Ebro SE Roy I8 s pep S 34 Meie ee ERS e mE 35 1 2 Ways to Manage the XOU04 iiicieccsesiecdecseo betae bte dtt iii aa NNE aE 35 1 2 Good Habits cor Managing tho ADU sii ssp dept aii nomen REPE alesse M pr da RR Ka 35 TALE DE QE ET 36 Chapter 2 PREG WON i t M 37 EE Noli En 37 CNET Ere MIU TERT TT IN ITI 37 22 hiema Call nn Me nhn a EE 39 La CUE CI ROR aas 39 Chapter 3 aurei AIS T IUOS 41 cA Makma nemna CA med 42 STT Congue SIP EXHI uui ssi ppt Dri er ta ao LES AK ROLE S ARAS HOHER AS BAR
296. on Management gt Pickup Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the Delete box and click Delete to remove this pickup group from the X6004 Machine ID This field displays the Machine ID on which this pickup group is configured Group name This field displays a pickup group name configured on the X6004 Description This field displays a description given to this pickup group Add Edit Delete Click Add to set up a new pickup group on the X6004 Edit to change the pickup group settings of an existing pickup group Delete remove a pickup group from the X6004 16 1 2 Add Edit Pickup Groups Use the Add Group screen to create a new pickup group Use the Edit Group screen to add or remove extensions from a pickup group To access this screen click the Add or Edit icon in the Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group screen Only the Add Group screen is shown Figure 137 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group Add Edit Pickup Group Machine ID ipPBx_oot Name Description sl ___Extensions Pool Extensions Select Extensions Select Apply Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 16 Pickup Group Each field is described in the following table Table 58 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Pickup Group Add Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Pickup Group Machine ID Select the X60
297. on solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed 2 Ownership X6004 User s Guide 313 Appendix B Open Software Announcements You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement 3 Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by United States Copyright Law and trade secret law and by international treaty provisions All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation 4 Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software You may not copy rever
298. one numbers that you want to block from calling you See Section 32 4 3 on page 271 Select Disable to turn this feature off for this extension Block the calls without Caller ID Select Enable and the X6004 will block all incoming calls from phone that do not send caller ID Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Reset Click this to begin configuring the fields again 32 4 1 DND White List Use this screen to edit the DND White List for your extension The X6004 will forward calls to these extensions even if you have DND enabled To access this screen click the DND White List button in the Forward Block screen Figure 227 Forward Block gt DND White List ZyXEL DND White List Vg br 7 Peer Info Forward Block Voice Mail Web Phone Number Add fg Apply Cancel X6004 User s Guide Chapter 32 Web Portal Each field is described in the following table Table 128 Forward Block gt DND White List LABEL DESCRIPTION Number Enter the telephone number you want to allow to call you even if you DND turned on Click Add and the number you entered displays in the field below Delete Highlight an existing DND White List number and click the Delete icon to remove it from the list Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to return to Forward Block screen 32 4 2 Find Me
299. onger save voice mail messages This value can be from 1 to 300 seconds Mail Relay Domain IP Specify the domain name or IP address of the mail relay server to which you want to send voice mail messages Mail Relay Port Specify the listening port number of the mail relay server to which you want to send voice mail messages Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Phonebook This chapter shows you how to set up a phonebook for the X6004 11 1 Phonebook Overview There are two ways to set up a phone book on the X6004 You can create an LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol phonebook which imports entries from an LDAP directory on your network You can also create local phonebook entries via the web configurator of the X6004 The entries in the phonebook are available to users on your network via the personal web portal of the X6004 see Chapter 32 on page 265 for more information on the web portal You can configure either type of phonebook or both If you configure both phonebooks then the entries from both phonebooks duplicate entries included are displayed to the end users 11 1 1 LDAP Based Phonebook LDAP directories are commonly used to store user based information within an organization For example email clients such as Outlook use LDAP to query a
300. only display log entries that are created as a result of some action originating at a particular IP address For example an administrator logging into the X6004 from a computer with a particular IP address on your network Type the IP address you want to search for as the source IP address of the X6004 Destination You can filter the logs to only display log entries that are created as a result of Address some action terminating at a particular IP address This is typically the X6004s LAN or WAN IP address Type the IP address you want to search for as the destination IP address of the X6004 Search Click Search to show the filtered results of your logs Only the logs that match the X6004 User s Guide criteria you specified are displayed Chapter 26 System Log 26 3 Log Setting The log setting screen lets you view the settings configured for the internal system log and the remote syslog servers Use this screen to access the configuration pages for internal and external log servers Click Report gt Logs gt System Log gt Log Setting to view the screen as shown next Figure 204 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt Log Setting Log Setting Log Setting 1 System Log Internal g 2 Remote Server 1 Syslog Log Facility Local 1 g 3 Remote Server 2 Syslog PAE EA 1 E 4 Remote Server 3 Syslog pensent 1 g Server Address 5 Remote Server 4 Syslog E Mail Server Mail Subject Send From
301. oo i eden wee 272 Table 133 Hardware Specifications uesaleseren inaasinta anaana Lea da eie bn ae da Pena daa a Ep Een Lad E xa 283 He ENOMuEeecsp uiein Y 284 Table 135 Standards Supported isasun ERE PE ERU HER S Enea do EE aded Rote aee 285 Table 136 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example sssssssseeeeee 288 Tape dor SUDO MASKS saa aa des Ri EE ANDE danas 289 Table 138 Maximum H st NUMDETS aeui isi enisi depu a aia eta tb ea p ERA Y Rr ed xa oou ted d wa 289 Table 139 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation o ccccccccccececessseeseeseseeeeececeseeeeceeseesesesaeseasaeaaeeseeeeees 289 WARNS TAU Leon a n 291 ute NAE is NN E 292 MARE TAA SUG I e mE 292 Table 145 SUDDBES cai rian Ge a ea ober ei ee ei o Rec pat ec ptu ad 292 jo xL ioris re UT 292 Table 145 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning eecceieceeeeeiiceese sese daten dentata 293 Table 146 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning sess eee eene 293 X6004 User s Guide PART I Introduction and Tutorials Getting to Know Your X6004 This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the X6004 1 1 Introduction An IP PBX is a telephone exchange device located at a company site which allows an organization to set up and control calls IP stands for Internet Protocol and PBX stands for Private Branch Exchange A regular company telepho
302. oot the system as a basic troubleshooting step Rebooting the X6004 does not change any of the configuration settings Rebooting simply restarts all of the subsystems voice processing network interfaces and so on and reloads the latest saved configuration on the X6004 Click Maintenance gt Reboot to open the Reboot screen Click the Reboot button to restart the X6004 Figure 72 Maintenance gt Reboot Reboot Note Click the Reboot button will reboot the device This action will take a few minutes Please wait for a few minutes Reboot 5 9 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click the Logout button b in the navigation panel to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator Figure 73 Web Configurator Logout Link ZyXEL MORES AND DEES 533994 AF board 4 VR Refresh None F I Interval System Information n i 1 i WAN LAN nes mm 1 On 172 23 37 201 192 168 1 10 Master i 00 AVA 0 b2 IPPBX Information Hardware Information 5 10 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen X6004 User s Guide Network
303. opriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and te
304. or example night clerk or you may want to divert all incoming calls to voice mail See Chapter 19 on page 175 for more information on configuring auto attendant Individuals can also specify their own office hours to deal with calls differently during various parts of the work week See Section 14 3 4 on page 135 for more information 13 2 Office Hour Screen Use this screen to specify office hours for the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Office Hour Figure 102 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Office Hour Office Hour Setting Office Hours Days of Week IV sun M Mon M Tue M wed M Thu M Fri M sat Time o0 v 00 oo oo Apply Default Each field is described in the following table Table 33 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Office Hour LABEL DESCRIPTION Office Hours Use this section to specify office hours on the X6004 Days of Week Check the days of the week which you want the X6004 to treat as working days X6004 User s Guide 123 Chapter 13 Office Hours Table 33 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Office Hour LABEL DESCRIPTION Time Specify the time range during the working days that you want the X6004 to treat as working hours Apply Click Apply to save your changes Default Click this button to set every field in this screen to fact
305. orized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transfer the Work
306. ork Use these screens to configure network settings on the X6004 LAN Use this screen to configure the LAN IP address of the X6004 WAN Use this screen to configure the WAN IP address of the X6004 DDNS Use this screen to specify DNS servers that the X6004 uses for domain name to IP address mappings NTP Use this screen to configure the time settings on the X6004 Static Route Use this screen to specify any static routes for the X6004 PBX Use these screens to configure settings related to the telephony functions of the X6004 Server Use these screens to configure the SIP server auto provisioning quality of Configuration service voice mail phonebook DSP Digital Signal Processor and office hour settings Extension Use this screen to create and manage extension numbers for the IP and FXS Management analog phones connected to the X6004 OutboundLine Use this screen to configure outbound line configurations to FXO ITSP and SIP Management peer connections Group Use this screen to associate groups with dialing rules This specifies which Management outbound lines members of a department can use Call Services Use these screens to configure emergency call settings conference calling music on hold settings distinctive ring settings auto callback and call parking ZyStack Use these screens to configure a group of X6004 s to work together Setting Use this screen to add peer X6004s
307. orward to next menu Click Next Menu to configure the settings for a sub menu Add Edit Delete Click Add to create a new option for this auto attendant menu Edit to change the settings for an auto attendant option Delete to remove this option from this Menu Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 19 4 3 Add Edit Auto Attendant Option Use this screen to configure an option for an auto attendant menu To access this screen click the Add or Edit icon in the menu screen of an auto attendant BES Only the Add Option screen is shown In the Edit Option screen some of the labels change from Add to Edit Figure 164 Add Edit Auto Attendant Option Auto Attendant Add Option Key Description Action Extension Forward to an extension Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 75 Add Edit Auto Attendant Option LABEL DESCRIPTION Key Type the digit s a caller should dial to execute this option You can enter up to 5 digits Description Type a description for this auto attendant option You can use alphanumeric characters and spaces are allowed You can also leave this field blank Action Specify the action for this auto attendant option The choices are Forward to an extension to forward a call to a specific extension For
308. ory default configuration X6004 User s Guide Authority Group This chapter shows you how to create and manage SIP and FXS extensions on the X6004 14 1 Extension Management Overview The X6004 allows you to manage individual SIP and FXS extensions Before extensions can be created you need to create at least one authority group on the X6004 See the How It Works chapter on page 37 for an overall explanation of authority groups and extensions This chapter focuses on how to create authority groups on the X6004 It also shows you how to configure settings for SIP and FXS extensions on the X6004 Basically you can think of an authority group as a set of extensions SIP FXS or both You use an authority group to assign equal rights to the entire set of extensions For example if you create two authority groups you can allow one group to make local calls and long distance calls and the second authority group to make local calls only Authority groups and extensions follow these guidelines You have to create at least one authority group on the X6004 Each extension can only be a member of one authority group SIP and FXS extensions are treated the same within an authority group The following sections describe how to configure authority groups on the X6004 See Section 14 3 on page 131 for more information on features related to individual extensions X6004 User s Guide 125 Chapter 14 Authority Group
309. ot allowed SIP Auth Select Customization and type the SIP password associated with this extension Password The IP phone registering with the X6004 must provide this for authentication The password can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed If you are using auto provisioning see Chapter 8 on page 103 you can select Random and type the length of the password 4 32 The X6004 will assign a random SIP password to this extension The password will be automatically sent to the IP phone client Description Type a brief description for this SIP extension This field can be left blank X6004 User s Guide 133 Chapter 14 Authority Group Table 41 Add a SIP Extension LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 14 3 3 Configure SIP Extensions After you create SIP extensions you can click on the Edit button in the Authority Group configuration screen to configure further settings The Basic screen for a SIP extension appears as shown Figure 109 SIP Extension Basic Basic Setting Group Extension Number SIP Auth Password Department First Name Last Name Description Web IVR VM PIN Code SIP Auth User Name Sales 1000 1000 m r Apply Back to Peer List Each field is described in the following table Table 42 SIP Ex
310. otherwise it displays offline Call Status This field displays busy if a SIP extension is currently engaged otherwise it displays idle 25 2 FXS Peer Status Use the FXS Peer screen to view status information about the FXS extensions configured on the X6004 Click Monitor gt Status Observation gt FXS Peer in the web configurator to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 25 Status Observation Figure 199 Monitor Status Observation FXS Peer FXS Peer Query FXS Peer PPBX 0 IPPBX 0 IPPBX 0 IPPBX 0 Machine D x erex uris lach e ID Query Refresh interval 0 sec Apply 01 A 1 5000 idle 01i 4 2 N A idle 01 A 3 N A idle 0i 4 4 N A idle Each field is described in the following table Table 100 Monitor gt Status Observation gt FXS Peer LABEL DESCRIPTION Query Use this section to specify your query criteria You can select an attribute value pair for your search You can choose to query by Machine ID choose the X6004 if you have a ZyStack configured for which you want to view status details of FXS extensions e Call Status select whether you want to view status details about extensions that are currently busy or idle Click Query to update the status detail table in the FXS Peer section of the screen Refresh interval Enter how often seconds you want the X6004 to update this screen Click Apply to updat
311. oup 1 Figure 176 Group Management Outbound Line Group to Ring Group Page Group 1 CK E N 959 A1001 Xa 1004 X 1002 Aa 1005 QS 1003 AA 1006 Hunt Group 1 XA 1007 Aa 2005 Waz203 A1006 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 21 Group Management 21 2 Group Management Screen Use this screen to view and manage the associations for the authority and outbound line groups configured on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management Figure 177 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management Group Management Authority Group IPPBX_001 default Default Group For Extensions FXO Trunk SS N Outgoing Group for IPPBX 001 FXO1 FXO1 SIP Trunk SS RENT UT MEN aS Ta RTT TON IPPBX 001 SIP1 ee m for Trusted Peer a IPPBX 001 Groupi Groupi Peers Each field is described in the following table Table 80 Configuration PBX Group Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Authority Group These headings separate the group types you can manage on the X6004 FXO Trunk SIP Authority Group These are the authority groups containing extensions on Trunk Trusted the X6004 Peer Outbound Group These are outside lines via the FXO ports on the X6004 SIP Trunk These are outside lines to a SIP server at your VoIP service provider Trust Peer These are outside lines to another SIP server for example another X6004 that has configured your X6004 as a Trust Peer
312. ovide intercom calling by extension and VoIP features in a small business environment The X6004 s capability can be expanded by A Adding DSP Digital Signal Processing modules to handle more concurrent telephone connections DSP modules are chips which convert analog information into digital data and vice versa B Adding a hard disk to store a greater volume of voice messages and call records C Connecting several X6004s together to manage a larger telephone network Figure 3 Scalable Design direi ITSP EBRRSRARRRSESARHAREHSRAERRSRARERERSRRERARRSBAREHARBARSARRRSRREHARAAERSRARAR 1 2 Ways to Manage the X6004 Use any of the following methods to manage the X6004 Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the X6004 using a supported web browser You can also use the web configurator for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the web configurator and In some cases are necessary to configure advanced features FTP Use FTP for firmware upgrades 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the X6004 Do the following things regularly to make the X6004 more secure and to manage the X6004 more effectively Change the administrator password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters X6004 User s Guide 35 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your X6004
313. phone to the X6004 you subscribe to the telephone services of the X6004 Authority Group This is a set of extensions Each extension can only belong to one authority group Authority groups manage extensions by allowing them to make only certain types of calls For example if you create two authority groups you can allow one group to make local calls and long distance calls and the second authority group to make local calls only Outbound Line Group This is a set of connections or lines going to the outside world SIP Trunk This is a connection to your ITSP Internet Telephony Service Provider Trusted Peer This is a connection to another IP PBX or SIP server The trusted peer device must also specify your X6004 as a trusted peer e X6004 User s Guide Chapter 2 How It Works FXO Foreign Exchange Office Trunk This type of outbound line group consists of telephone cables connected to ports on an FXO interface card on the X6004 The telephone cables lead to the PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network or in other words your traditional non VoIP telephone company FXO ports always point in the direction of the telephone services The figure below shows the relationship between FXS and FXO ports Figure 5 FXS and FXO Ports LCR Least Cost Routing This is a rule which specifies which outbound line group is used when making an outbound call It consists of a dialing condition for example dial 0 to ma
314. plied to the X6004 30 1 1 Backup amp Restore Screen Use this screen to back up or restore a configuration on the X6004 You can also use this screen to reset the X6004 to the factory default settings To access this screen click Maintenance gt Backup amp Restore X6004 User s Guide Chapter 30 System File Maintenance Figure 218 Maintenance gt Backup amp Restore Backup amp Restore Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Upload File path Browse Upload flie Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user entered configuration information and return to factory defaults After resetting the Username will be adrnin Password will be 1234 LAN IP address will be 192 168 1 12 Default Each field is described in the following table Table 120 Maintenance Backup amp Restore LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup Configuration Backup Click this to save the X6004 s current configuration to a file on your computer Once your device is configured and functioning properly it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes The backup configuration file is useful if you need to return to your previous se
315. ply before you can add a dial condition Figure 170 LCR Dial Condition LCR List LCR Item Dial Condition Dial Condition LCR Name OutRulei Dial Condition Number Pattern Test Dial Number Viewer a channel si Offset FE Le 7 th N m fix Postfix IPPBX_OO01 FXO1L Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 79 LCR Dial Condition LABEL DESCRIPTION Dial Condition LCR Name This field displays the name of the outbound dialing rule that this dialing condition applies to Dial Condition Create the criteria for using this outbound dialing rule The criteria can be aspecific number for example 55555555 in this case the number dialed by users must match this string exactly any number starting with a specified pattern of digits for example 0 555 011 and so on in this case the number dialed must match the digits before the period and it doesn t matter what follows For example dialing 0222 2222 matches the dialing condition 0 You can also specify a range for digits within a dial condition You can use the letters X Z N to specify a range of numbers to match X represents the range 0 9 Z represents the range 1 9 and N represents the range 2 9 use brackets to specify an allowed range for a dialed digit For example 0 8 or 0 4 6 9 in the second example 5 is not allowed Use the Right button to test if the d
316. pter 15 Ring Group Figure 133 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management Group Management Management Authority Group IPPBX 001 Basic FXO Trunk a EET TCR ICT EET IPPBX 001 PSTNL SIP Trunk IPPBX 001 ITSP1 Trusted Peer a eee ee Description Advanced setting 7 Select the Marketing check box in the Advanced Setting column and click Apply Figure 134 Page Group to Authority Group Assignment Group Management Accessible Group List Group Name Basic ezout easy to call out O local call local call LCR LCR lv long distance call long distance call LCR LCR Iv international call international call LCR LCR rH a Marketing Ring Group Gu e omen Callers from extensions in the Basic authority group can now dial 888 enter the PIN code 444 and page the Marketing page group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 15 Ring Group X6004 User s Guide Pickup Group This chapter shows you how to configure and manage pickup groups on the X6004 16 1 Pickup Group Overview The X6004 allows you to organize sets of extensions into pickup groups All telephone users with extensions in the same pickup group can answer incoming calls for any member of that group For example you may want to configure a pickup group for your sales department If a call comes in to one salesperson but they are not available to answer the call then another member of the sales team can pickup the call The memb
317. r Released Date This field indicates the date and time that the currently installed firmware on the X6004 was released Select Upload File Use this section to upload new firmware to the X6004 File Path Enter the location of the bin or rom file you want to upload or click Browse to find it You must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them X6004 User s Guide 255 Chapter 30 System File Maintenance Table 121 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Browse Click this to find the bin or rom file you want to upload Upload Click this to begin uploading the selected file This may take several minutes Note Do not turn off the device while firmware upload is in progress 30 3 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading files to the X6004 using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 30 3 1 Filename Conventions The following types of files can be uploaded to the X6004 Base firmware contains basic operating instructions for the X6004 This file has a bin extension for example 100AVA1b1 bin e Main firmware contains the main software features of the X6004 This file has a rom extension for example 100AVATb1 rom Factory Default Settings contains the default configuration of the X6004 This file has a romd extension for example 100AVA b1 romd Firmware an
318. r registration record is deleted SIP clients should be configured to automatically try to re register with the X6004 Make sure that the client SIP devices are configured to re register at an interval smaller than the time set in this field RTP Port Range When you make a VoIP call using SIP the RTP Real time Transport Protocol is used to handle voice data transfer Enter the listening port number s for RTP traffic or keep the default values Enter the port number at the beginning of the range in the first field and enter the port number at the end of the range in the second field Default Ring Time Specify for how many seconds the X6004 sends a ringing tone to client devices for incoming calls Codec G723 1 Select Enable to turn on support for G723 1 voice codec or select Disable to turn off support for the G723 1 voice codec Note This setting only takes affect after a system restart X6004 User s Guide Chapter 7 SIP Server Table 18 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Global Set LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 7 3 FXO Channel An FXO channel is a connection from the X6004 to a traditional PBX for example a PSTN connection via one of the FXO ports installed on the X6004 After you install the FXO interface card on the X6004 see the Q
319. r network installed on the X6004 DSP This field displays the capacity of the DSP Digital Signal Processing modules installed on the X6004 The capacity is displayed in the number of channels the X6004 can process at any one time IPPBX Information This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured then this screen displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack Outbound Line These fields display the number of outside lines configured on the X6004 They are divided into the following categories FXO Trunk connections via the FXO ports to your local telephone company SIP Trunk connections to a SIP server at your VoIP provider Trusted Peer lines connections to a peer SIP device A peer SIP device could be another X6004 or another SIP server that allows you to use its services License These fields display the number of licenses you have for subscription services via myZyXEL com website The services are divided into the following categories Extension This is the number of SIP extensions you can configure on the X6004 softphone This is the number of ZyXEL s V100 softphones you can register with the X6004 Device Monitor X6004 User s Guide Chapter 24 System Information Table 98 Monitor System Information continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZySt
320. r or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device Use only No 26 AWG American Wire Gauge or larger telecommunication line cord Warning To avoid risk of electric shock remove only one card at a time and do not place fingers or objects inside the chassis Cover empty slots with slot covers X6004 User s Guide Safety Warnings This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly X6004 User s Guide Safety Warnings X6004 User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Introduction and Tutorials i2 ocior cr Derek E eCaEE E ck pex o FE cESIa e Yexb eu RUE ba kre be XR FECE P DE CERE E ERR KL cR RE nk 31 COGN TO dst Ecol T 33 miss Ec TC 37 Eli e ENT 41 Phone User Wun RETE Emm 65 Web Configurator amp Network Setup cccccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeens 73 PRS PS EO OHMCMIAION e 75 MONGI DEDY MEN annen EFHRN IDEM PHIUQN S MERE FA ID M EE
321. r to view the screen as shown Figure 198 Monitor Status Observation SIP Peer Query Machine ID z Refresh interval o sec Apply SIP Peer IPPBX 001 Sales 1000 1000 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1001 1001 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1002 1002 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1003 1003 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales i004 1004 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1005 1005 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1006 1006 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1000 web1000 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1001 web1001 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1002 web1002 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1003 webi003 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1004 web1004 offline idle IPPBX_001 Sales 1005 web1005 offline idle IPPBX 001 Sales 1006 web1006 offline idle X6004 User s Guide Chapter 25 Status Observation Each field is described in the following table Table 99 Monitor Status Observation SIP Peer LABEL DESCRIPTION Query Use this section to specify your query criteria You can select an attribute value pair for your search You can choose to query by e Machine ID choose the X6004 if you have a ZyStack configured for which you want to view status details of SIP extensions e Authority Group select a specify authority group for which you want to view status details of SIP extensions Registration Status select to view status details about SIP extension with which SIP devices have registered online or view status det
322. r uses videophones you must specify the video codecs used for video calls The X6004 allows the following video codecs to passthrough H 261 e H 263 H 264 See Section 14 1 2 on page 127 for more information on video codecs Codec Pool This column indicates the codec types not used for this trusted peer connection You can add a codec type to be used for these extensions by highlighting it and hitting the Right button Codec List This column indicates the codec types used for this trusted peer connection You can organize the priority of the codecs by highlighting it and clicking the Up or Down buttons to move the codec higher or lower in priority The SIP extensions attempt to use the higher priority codecs first and try the lower priority codecs next You can remove a codec type from being used from these extension by highlighting it and hitting the Left button Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group X6004 User s Guide Auto Attendant This chapter shows you how to configure auto attendant on the X6004 19 1 Auto Attendant Overview An auto attendant is software which acts as an automatic switchboard operator auto attendants help route incoming calls to their proper extension An auto attendant is assigned to each out
323. ration F W Version This field displays the firmware version currently installed on the X6004 Hardware Information This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured then this screen displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack CPU MIPS This field displays the speed of the processing chip on the X6004 in MIPS Millions of Instructions Per Second Memory MB This field displays the total RAM memory available on the X6004 This is the memory available for processing functions on the X6004 File System This field displays the total memory available for the files system on the X6004 The file system stores information such as configuration settings CDR and voicemail This number is the sum of the built in flash memory and the optional hard disk if installed Trunk port These fields display the number of FXO ports ports leading to the PSTN and the number of FXS ports ports leading to analog phones on your network installed on the X6004 DSP This field displays the capacity of the DSP Digital Signal Processing modules installed on the X6004 The capacity is displayed in the number of channels the X6004 can process at any one time IPPBX Information This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured then this screen displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack Outbound Line These fields display the number of outside lines config
324. receive configuration settings from the X6004 This field is blank for extensions assigned to software based IP phones Serial No This field displays the serial number of the software based IP phone specified to receive configuration settings from the X6004 This field is blank for extensions assigned to hardware based IP phones SPTGEN File This field displays Yes if a configuration file SPTGEN file has been created It Exist displays No if an SPTGEN file has not been created Edit Click the Edit icon to create a configuration file and associate it with a ZyXEL device on your network The Auto Provision Settings screen opens View SPTGEN Click the Advanced icon to view the settings in the configuration file 8 2 1 Auto Provision Edit Settings Use this screen to set up the auto provisioning settings for an extension on the X6004 and associate it with a ZyXEL device on your network To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit Figure 90 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt Auto Provision gt Edit Auto Provision Setting Provisioning Setting MAC Address ee Serial No sd Auto Provision Active On Auto Provision Interval Time ox seconds lt 1 26000000 gt Auto Provision Delay Time Random seconds ATA device Vv Port No F E SetProfile Cancel Each field is described in the following table Tab
325. rface Description Web IVR VM PIN Code X Slot Slot C Port Port 1 z m Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 49 Add an FXS Extension LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Setting Extension Type the extension number for this analog phone extension The extension Number number can be from 1 to 20 digits in length Interface Specify the location on the FXS interface card that the analog phone with this extension is connected to Web IVR VM PIN Code Type the PIN code that this allows the person with this extension to access the web portal Interactive Voice Response system or Voice Mail This value can be X6004 User s Guide up to eight alphanumeric characters and spaces are not allowed Chapter 14 Authority Group Table 49 Add an FXS Extension LABEL DESCRIPTION Description Type a brief description for this FXS extension This field can be left blank Apply Click Apply to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to go back to Authority Group configuration page without saving your changes 14 3 11 Configure FXS Extensions After you create FXS extensions you can click on the Edit button in the Authority Group configuration screen to configure further settings associated with the extensions The Basic screen for an FXS extension appears as shown Figure 117 FXS Extension Basic Basic Setting Group Sales 7
326. rgency number from the X6004 22 3 Conference Calling Overview The X6004 allows you to set up specific extension numbers which callers can dial to join a conference call This type of extension is referred to as a conference room number You can restrict the number of callers that can join the conference call You can also specify a PIN Personal Identification Number for the conference room Callers must enter the PIN before they can enter the conference room If you have multiple X6004s working together ZyStack then you can specify which one should hold the conference room This allows you choose which X6004s resources are being used for the conference call The resources used up include DSP channels and outside lines coming into your organization X6004 User s Guide Chapter 22 Call Services Callers within your organization simply call the conference room number to join the conference call Callers from the outside dial the conference room number after they are prompted by auto attendant to dial the extension they wish to call 22 3 1 Conference Calling Configuration Use this screen to manage conference calling on the X6004 Click Configuration gt PBX gt Call Settings gt Meet me Conference to view the following screen Figure 180 Conference Room List Conference Room List ZyStack Resource Machine 1D L conference J CANI IPPBX 001 0 22 Conference Room List Delete add B edit fi Delete D
327. riteria you type or select Partially Match if you want to enter only a part of the group name that you want to search for Alternatively use the Bal button to select the outbound line group or authority group configured on the X6004 that you want to use as your search criterion Channel Type the name of the type of channel for which you want to search the call detail record The channels can be either FXS extensions FXO outbound channels or SIP based connections Use the drop down listbox to choose Totally Match if you want to display only call records that exactly match the criteria you type in or select Partially Match if you want to enter only a part of the group name that you want to search for Alternatively use the jes button to select the channel configured on the X6004 that you want to use as your search criterion Next use the drop down list box to select whether you want to search calls originating from this channel SRC terminating via this channel Dest or both Both Caller Number Type the telephone number of the caller for which you want to search the call detail record Use the drop down listbox to choose Totally Match if you want to display only call records that exactly match the criteria you type in or select Partially Match if you want to enter only a part of the telephone number to search for Dialed Number Type the dialed telephone number of the callee for which you want to search the call detail record
328. rks that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the following places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notw
329. rom an authority group to a ring group you allow the extensions in that authority group to call the page group or the hunt group configured within the ring group Ring groups consist of a set of extensions that do not have to be from a single authority group See Chapter 15 on page 145 for more information on ring groups In the following example authority group Sales is associated to Ring Group A Ring Group A consists of Page Group 1 allows you to call all the extensions within Page Group 1 simply by dialing the page group number 888 Hunt Group 1 allows you to call extensions within Hunt Group 1 based on the algorithm defined in the hunt group setup simply by dialing the hunt group number 999 All the extensions in the authority group Sales can call Page Group 1 or Hunt Group 1 Figure 173 Group Management Authority Group to Ring Group Page Group 1 CRC a 998 355 1001 Xa 1004 52 1002 A 1005 X 1003 A 1006 Hunt Group 1 XA 1007 As 2005 A55 2003 amp 5 1006 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 21 Group Management 21 1 2 Managing Outbound Line Groups Outbound line groups include SIP Trunks FXO Trunks and Trusted Peers as defined in Chapter 18 on page 163 For management purposes the X6004 grants rights to calls coming in via these channels based on the outbound line group they are part of You can manage incoming calls by associating linking outbound line groups with Authority Group
330. rom these extension by highlighting it and clicking the Left button Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group 18 5 Auto Attendant for SIP Trunks Use this screen to select which auto attendant should be used with this outbound line group See Chapter 19 on page 175 for information on configuring auto attendant You can also configure your DID Direct Inward Dialing settings Click the Auto Attendant icon in the in the SIP Trunk section of the Outbound Group configuration screen to view the screen as shown Figure 148 AA for SIP Trunks Auto Attendant DID C Enable DID Mapping Disable Apply AA 7 Extension Number for FAX Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 68 AA for SIP Trunks LABEL DESCRIPTION Auto Attendant DID Select Enable to have the X6004 check if the numbers dialed by outside callers to the X6004 match any of the extensions on your network The X6004 forwards calls that match Dialed In Digits rules you configure in the DID Mapping screen to the extensions on your network Click DID Mapping to configure Direct Inward Dialing rules Select Disable to allow all incoming calls to be handled by the Auto Attendant Apply AA Select the Auto Attendant you want to use when calls come in
331. rt niter ttn tne tet rr etait eap enee a a 181 Figure 164 Add Edit Auta Altendaht Option 125 oenrtt tri ette ta de a IH er Ey ERE be de ant e sive 182 Figure 165 Auto Attendant Menu Settings Night Service ccccccseeeccccceteeeccneeeteeecaneeeteeecaneneneees 183 Figure 166 LOR Components Example i3ucicsssvesbesciss vudbebux oar idco exE RE FEN P EN e DI USE eeii iai 185 X6004 User s Guide List of Figures Figure T67 LER Components EXOEBIB 22 rc Eur ERE aAA osa do Fev EIE n PI RU PLE IR TAA 186 Figure 168 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR sere 186 Figure 169 LOR Seer M M 187 zc TOL E DAO ONIO E 189 Figure 171 Group Management Authority Group to Authority Group see 191 Figure 172 Group Management Authority Group to LOR asscscccsssesecsserteueccsavsenea emnt itta innare 192 Figure 173 Group Management Authority Group to Ring Group see 192 Figure 174 Group Management Outbound Line Group to Authority Group seeeees 193 Figure 175 Group Management Outbound Line Group to LOR eeeeeeeeeeeeene nnne 194 Figure 176 Group Management Outbound Line Group to Ring Group sese 194 Figure 177 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management Loretta poorer tna parten m a iar reum pau pce 195 Figure 178 Configuration gt PBX gt Group Management gt Advanced
332. rtdhcp 2 1 nfs 1 1 0 qmail 1 3 17 rpc 2 3 6 and httptunnel 3 0 5 under the GNU General Public License GNU General Public License Linux is written and distributed under the GNU General Public License which means that its source code is freely distributed and available to the general public GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too X6004 User s Guide 297 Appendix B Open Software Announcements When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or ca
333. ructions for the X6004 When you upload this type of file you may see new features or changes in the GUI of the X6004 Find firmware at www zyxel com Read the firmware release notes before uploading the firmware files The upload process uses HTTPS and may take several minutes After a successful upload the system reboots lt gt Do not turn off the device while firmware upload is in progress Use this screen to view the current firmware version on the X6004 and to update the X6004 if you have newer firmware To access this screen click the Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Figure 219 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Information Boot Module 0 02 Current Version 1 00 4 A 0 b3 Released Date 2007 01 26 19 10 46 Select Upload File To upload firmware package browse to the location of the file and then click Upload File Path Browse Upload Each field is described in the following table Table 121 Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Information This section displays information about the firmware currently installed on the X6004 Boot Module This field indicates the version of the boot module installed on the X6004 The boot module is software that tells the X6004 how to install and run the firmware Each firmware release only works when the proper boot module is installed on the X6004 Current Version This field indicates the firmware version numbe
334. runk rye Machine 1D Group Name UserName Host __ Port Registration Status IPPBX 001 ITSP1L admin 172 23 37 202 5060 IPPBX 001 Voip 232323 10 1 1 1 5060 Each field is described in the following table Table 102 Monitor gt Status Observation gt SIP Trunk LABEL DESCRIPTION Query Use this section to specify your query criteria You can select an attribute value pair for your search You can choose to query by e Machine ID choose the X6004 if you have a ZyStack configured for which you want to view status details of SIP trunks Registration Status select to view status details about SIP trunks which have successfully registered with a SIP server online SIP trunks which are in the process of registering with a SIP server Auth Sent or SIP trunks that have failed to register with a SIP server offline Call Status select whether you want to view status details about SIP trunks that are currently busy or idle Click Query to update the status detail table in the SIP Trunk section of the Screen Refresh interval Enter how often seconds you want the X6004 to update this screen Click Apply to update the screen immediately If you do not want this screen to update periodically enter 0 SIP Trunk This section displays the status detail table Machine ID This field displays the auto configured name of the X6004 Group Name This field displays the outbound
335. rver Address 72201309 REGISTER Server Port Bos SIP Service Domain 22309 DTMF Mode no Caller ID amp on C Extension Number User Name 777000 Password Fe Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 67 Configure a SIP Trunk LABEL DESCRIPTION SIP Setting Number Enter the SIP number associated with the SIP account for this SIP trunk In the full SIP URI this is the part before the symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII characters SIP Local Port Enter the X6004 s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value SIP Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP server provided by your VoIP service provider You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters It does not matter whether the SIP server is a proxy redirect or register server SIP Server Port Enter the SIP server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider gave you one Otherwise keep the default value REGISTER Enter the IP address or domain name of the SIP register server if your VoIP Server Address Service provider gave you one Otherwise enter the same address you entered in the SIP Server Address field You can use up to 95 printable ASCII characters REGISTER Enter the SIP register server s listening port number if your VoIP service provider Server Port gave you one Otherwise enter the same port
336. ry This field is limited to 20 alphanumeric a z A Z 0 9 characters Spaces and dashes are also allowed You cannot change this value if you are editing an existing local phonebook entry ext Type a ext value for this local phonebook entry This field is limited to 20 numeric characters 0 9 home Type a home value for this local phonebook entry This field is limited to 20 numeric characters 0 9 mobile Type a mobile value for this local phonebook entry This field is limited to 20 numeric characters 0 9 e mail Type a e mail value for this local phonebook entry This field is limited to 127 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed but and is not logon name Type a logon name value for this local phonebook entry This field is limited to 127 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed but is not country Type a country value for this local phonebook entry This field is limited to 127 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed but is not department Type a department value for this local phonebook entry This field is limited to 127 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed but is not Apply Click Apply to save your settings Cancel Click Cancel to return to the Local Phonebook screen without saving your changes X6004 User s Guide DSP Management This chapter shows you how to install additional Digital Signal Processing DSP modules in the X6004 and
337. s When you create an outbound line group it is by default linked to all authority groups created on the X6004 This means that calls coming in via this outbound line group are authorized to call any extension created on the X6004 You can remove the link from an outbound line group to an authority group to stop incoming calls from an outbound line group from going to a specific authority group BS You must also configure auto attendant settings before calls coming in from outside lines can call the extensions created on the X6004 See Chapter 19 on page 175 The following example shows a configuration with three outbound line groups ITSP represents a SIP trunk to your VoIP service provider PSTN represents a link to your local traditional telephone service provider and TrustedPeer is a connection to your branch office Incoming calls from ITSP and from PSTN are allowed to only reach extensions of your sales team AG1 Calls coming in from TrustedPeer are allowed to reach the extensions of both the sales AG1 and research AG2 departments This configuration is accomplished by removing the association to AG2 from the ITSP and PSTN outbound line groups Figure 174 Group Management Outbound Line Group to Authority Group ES UN TN TrustedPeer intenet PSTN y ITS AG1 Sales SA we AG2 SS Research A Ga X6004 User s Guide Chapter 21 Group Management LCRs LCR is the outbound dialing rule
338. s we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appr
339. s i55 riter iate erra enu Er 93 aeta erp 4 A EERR S 170 19 0 Tusted Peer COmItj SUD 25 3 05 tmo 30 tn dM Rode DU uitio a pte oU GR d i tue aie 171 18 6 1 Add Edit Trusted Poer ETE T T die 171 16 6 2 Trusted Peer COnnguration e 172 Chapter 19 PUTO FATS Lr eee 175 18 1 Auta Attendant OVEIVIEW ees esae ee dein the eh Ped n ek Kuna Uu k eek a ela kx phat ER aw ERR aad pa 175 Qs ic UIA AINE Uh eU e Deme 175 19 2 T Configuring s M 176 19 3 Auto Attendant Audio FIGS orate cninnaa eres sa te trek ad ebd s P ad aa E RR EL E ga 177 19 3 1 Recording Auto Attendant Audio Files eese 177 19 4 Auto Attendant Management 2 5 eiecit i doc ia ooi re og LR d 179 jml axsNcpeccip irap 180 19 4 2 Auto Attendant Menu Settings 221 ccssiccicsssurecnses ssuacenes deese dmt eiit dare snenia 180 19 4 3 Add Edit Auto Altendant ODEBOFTE iiie seen cerea tenth tanidan Earn aaa n REB nr Renta Ee E Fa 182 19 4 4 Auto Attendant Night Service Settings cccceecsceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeananeets 183 Chapter 20 Be 185 CUTIE 26 LL E 185 cues dar rw RE 186 ZU 2A LOR CONMTQURAUIOM P M 187 20 2 2 Add Edit LOR Dial Condition 2s esee trant tak bra ak na da n td 188 Chapter 21 Group Managment e 191 41 1
340. s in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The X6004 icon is not an exact representation of your device The X6004 Computer Notebook computer Server Firewall wax ns GERE cw amu HS e Num GE guru uum Gaia ug m gue pro No aan ae mj SS Telephone Switch Router Oc E3 X6004 User s Guide a Safety Warnings Safety Warnings gt For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adapto
341. s of the X6004 incorporate source code covered under the Apache License GPL License BSD like License Open SSL License OpenLDAP License NTP License Expat License PPP License Netkit telnet License and other third parties software licenses presented afore To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses please contact ZyXEL Communications Corporation at ZyXEL Technical Support End User License Agreement for X6004 WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL INC IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentati
342. screen click the Black List button in the Call Forward screen Figure 113 Black List Black List Number Add Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 46 Black List LABEL DESCRIPTION Number Enter the telephone number you want to block from calling you when you enable call blocking Click Add and the number you entered displays in the field below Delete Highlight an existing Black List number and click the Delete icon to remove it from the list Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to return to the Call Forward screen X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group 14 3 8 Voice Mail Settings Use this screen to set up a voice mail settings for this extension To access this screen click the Voice Mail tab in any of the SIP extension configuration screens Figure 114 SIP Extension Voice Mail Voice Mail Setting Received E mail Address I attached Voice File Delete Voice Message After Mailed Apply Back to Peer List Each field is described in the following table Table 47 SIP Extension Voice Mail LABEL DESCRIPTION Voice Mail Setting Received E mail Address Specify the e mail address you want to forward your voice message notifications to If you select the Attached Voice File option then complete voice messages are sent to this e mail address Attached Voice File Se
343. se engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software You may not market co brand private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT
344. se in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE ES NOTE Some component
345. sion does not exist on the X6004 then the call is dropped Click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code gt Internal Extension Length to view the screen as shown Figure 140 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code gt Internal Extension Length Internal Extension Length Set Call Access Code Internal Extension Length Note If the length of dial number is not in this range system will assume this call is an outgoing call Apply X6004 User s Guide Chapter 17 Call Access Code Each field is described in the following table Table 61 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code gt Internal Extension Length LABEL DESCRIPTION Internal Extension Specify the range of the length of telephone numbers that are treated by the Length X6004 as extension to extension calls Apply Click this to save your changes X6004 User s Guide Chapter 17 Call Access Code X6004 User s Guide Outbound Line Group This chapter shows you how to manage outside lines on the X6004 18 1 Outbound Line Group Overview The following diagram shows the X6004 connected to three possible types of outside connections FXO Trunk A shows the X6004 connected to the PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network via an FXO port on the X6004 You can also use the FXO ports to connect to a traditional PBX
346. sioning for the VoIP devices on your network See also Chapter 3 on page 41 for an auto provisioning tutorial 1 Configure extensions that you want to assign to VoIP devices on your network See Chapter 14 on page 125 2 Create an SPTGEN file this is a configuration file that can be downloaded by ZyXEL devices that support SPTGEN Use the Auto Provision screen described in Section 8 2 on page 104 to create this file You will need one ofthe following the MAC address of the IP phone or ATA or the serial number associated with a ZyXEL softphone This information is used to uniquely identify the device that you want to assign an extension to 3 Configure the auto provisioning compliant ZyXEL device or softphone to receive configuration information from the X6004 This typically involves specifying the protocol used for auto provisioning At the time of writing you can use HTTP protocol X6004 User s Guide Chapter 8 Auto Provision for auto provisioning with the X6004 See the documentation that came with your ZyXEL device for information on how to do this 8 1 2 How Auto Provisioning Works When a ZyXEL device is configured for auto provisioning it attempts to find an auto provisioning server on its network ZyXEL devices use Simple Service Discovery Protocol SSDP to find the IP address of an auto provisioning server for example the X6004 This process is referred to as auto discovery Some ZyXEL devices allow you to enter the I
347. spaces are not allowed Confirm Retype the new password for this administrator account Password Description Type a short description for this administrator account You can use up to 32 alphanumeric characters Spaces are allowed Rank Select the rank you want this administrator account to have You can select Full admin to allow this account to perform all configuration changes on the X6004 Debug admin to allow this account to perform all configuration changes on the X6004 This type of account is reserved for use by service technicians Read only to allow this account to only be able to view configuration details on the X6004 X6004 User s Guide 247 Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 116 Maintenance Administrator List Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes 28 3 2 Edit an Administrator Account Use this screen to change the password description or rank of an existing administrator account To access this screen click Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Edit Figure 215 Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Edit Edit admin adminstrator profile Password ros Confirm Password FS Description dmn Rank Level Fursdmn F Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 117 Maintenance gt Administrator List gt Edit
348. ss code for an authority group on the X6004 Edit to change the access code for an authority group Delete remove an access code configured for an authority group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 17 Call Access Code 17 1 1 Set Call Access Code Screen Use this screen to edit or create an access code on the X6004 To access this screen click the Edit or Add icons in the Call Access Code screen Figure 139 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Call Access Code Edit Add Set Call Access Code Set Call Access Code Group PM Access Code 5 10 digits Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 60 Configuration PBX Extension Management Call Access Code Edit Add LABEL DESCRIPTION Set Call Access Code Group Select the authority group you want to configure a call access code for You can only create one call access code per authority group Access Code Type the access code for this authority group Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to return to Call Access Code screen without saving your changes 17 1 2 Internal Extension Length Specify the length range of phone numbers for internal calls The X6004 treats these calls as an extension to extension call and does not try to use an outside line when making these calls If the length of the number dialed fits in this range but the exten
349. ssword l ef Password Confirm mas 30 alphanumeric printable characters and no spaces me e BS The first time you log in to the X6004 a wizard guides you through initial network configuration See the Quick Start Guide for an initial setup example X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator 5 3 The System Screen The System screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of the web configurator screen Figure 70 Web Configurator Home Screen System IPPB 172 23 37 201 192 168 1 10 Master Hardware Information CPU MIPS F ETE ye 257 EMEN ro ns 1 52756 4 4 AC ee c 21 1 Device Monitor IPPBX Information Si ESSUTTUONEEN FXO Trun 4 0 0 k SIP Trunk Trusted Peer Extension softphone CONSOLE RESET c o e L o A The navigation buttons link you to configuration menus of the X6004 the quick keys allow you to view built in help files access the wizard view the about screen and logout Use the Dashboard key to go to the main status page from any web configurator screen B The main part of the screen displays general information about the X6004 you are logged in to and any X6004 that are part of a ZyStack see Chapter 23 on page 207 C The device monitor is a graphical representation of the X6004 status and oth
350. t on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions X6004 User s Guide Appendix C Legal Information Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obta
351. t subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 138 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 242 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 20102 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 0925 6 Notation Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 139 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LASTOCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 139 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation contin
352. ted by the X6004 from the analog phones connected to the X6004 6 is the quietest and 6 is the loudest Listening Volume Select the volume level sent by the X6004 to the analog phones connected to the X6004 6 is the quietest and 6 is the loudest Dial Interval Enter the number of seconds the X6004 should wait after you stop dialing numbers from FXS extensions before it makes the phone call Country Code The signals used by telephone companies to indicate a busy line or an available line differ by country You must select the country code for the location of the X6004 The X6004 can then detect whether the FXS line is in use or available Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 7 4 Call Blocking Use this screen to have the X6004 not accept incoming calls from specific phone numbers or calls without caller ID Click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block to view the screen as shown next Figure 86 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Call Block Call Block System wise Call Block Black list Disable Enable Blacklist f Block the calls without Caller ID amp Disable Enable Apply Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 21 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt
353. tension Basic LABEL DESCRIPTION Basic Setting Group Select the authority group you want this extension to belong to Extension This field displays the extension number of this SIP extension Number Web IVR VM PIN Code Type the PIN code that this allows the person with this extension to access the web portal Interactive Voice Response IVR system or Voice Mail This value can be up to eight alphanumeric characters and spaces are not allowed SIP Auth User Name Type the SIP user name associated with this extension The IP phone registering with the X6004 must provide this for authentication The user name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed SIP Auth Type the SIP password associated with this extension The IP phone registering Password with the X6004 must provide this for authentication The password can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed Department Type the department for this SIP extension This field can be left blank First Name Type the first name of the person this SIP extension is assigned to This field can be left blank X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Table 42 SIP Extension Basic LABEL DESCRIPTION Last Name Type the last name of the person this SIP extension is assigned to This field can be left blank Description Type a brief description for this SIP extens
354. ter s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 240 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example 90m um um um um Em Em um um gt z wm um um um um EN EM EM NND GS DO UD UND X6004 User s Guide Appendix A IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 241 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example om um um um um Um um m BO a E 192 168 1 1 LAN WAN E uil Internet J 192 168 1 1 Same eee eee X6004 User s Guide Open Software Announcements Notice Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation BS This Product includes Linux Kernel 2 4 20 MySQL 5 0 20a Asterisk 1 2 0 repo
355. ter the code used to enable call forwarding when an extension is busy Busy On Call Forward Enter the code used to disable call forwarding when an extension is busy Busy Off Call Forward Enter the code used to edit call forwarding settings when an extension is busy Busy IVR Call Forward No Enter the code used to enable call forwarding when there is no answer at an Answer On extension Call Forward No Answer Off Enter the code used to disable call forwarding when there is no answer at an extension Call Forward No Answer IVR Enter the code used to edit call forwarding settings when there is no answer at an Call Transfer Enter the code used to transfer calls X6004 User s Guide extension Chapter 7 SIP Server Table 23 Configuration PBX Server Configuration SIP Server Feature Code LABEL DESCRIPTION Direct Pickup Enter the code used to pick up calls for your extension from a different extension DND On Enter the code used to turn the Do Not Disturb feature on for this extension DND Off Enter the code used to turn the Do Not Disturb feature off for this extension DND IVR Enter the code used to edit Do Not Disturb settings at an extension Follow Me On Enter the code used to turn the Follow Me feature on for this extension Follow Me Off Enter the code used to turn the Follow Me feature off for this extension Group Pickup Enter the code used to activate
356. the symbol You can use up to 127 printable ASCII Extended set characters X6004 User s Guide Chapter 18 Outbound Line Group Table 71 Trusted Peer Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION DTMF Mode Control how the X6004 handles the tones that the IP phones on your network make when they push their buttons One use of the tones is to distinguish between numbers when trying to dial a PSTN phone number You should use the same mode as your trusted peer The choices are rfc2833 Follow the RFC 2833 standard and send the DTMF tones in RTP packets inband Send the DTMF tones in the voice data stream This works best when you are using a codec that does not use compression like G 711 Codecs that use compression like G 729 can distort the tones info Send the DTMF tones in SIP messages Codec Setting Select the type of voice coder decoder codec that you want to use when communicating with the trusted peer See Section 14 1 1 on page 126 for more information on voice codecs The following codecs shown in highest quality to lowest quality order are supported by the X6004 e G711A typically used in Europe e G711p typically used in North America and Japan G729A e G723 1 you must activate support for this codec in the Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server screen G726 When two SIP devices start a SIP session they must agree on a codec If the trusted pee
357. the call is picked up or extensions in the group ring in a random order until the call is picked up 15 2 Ring Group Configuration Use this screen to set up ring groups on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group Figure 121 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group Ring Group add GP Advanced B Edit Delete IPPBX 001 Sales Sales de B uw IPPBX 001 RD RD PF A Each field is described in the following table Table 51 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Machine ID This field displays the ID of the X6004 on which a ring group is configured Group Name This field displays the name assigned to this ring group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 15 Ring Group Table 51 Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Description This field displays the description of the ring group Add Advanced Click Edit Delete Add to create a new ring group Advanced to configure the settings of a ring group Edit to change the description of a ring group Delete remove an existing ring group 15 2 1 Create a New Ring Group Use this screen to create a new ring group To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Extension Management gt Ring Group gt Add Figure 122 Configuration gt PBX gt
358. the users with a list of the features and corresponding codes Users on your network can then dial a code from their telephone to activate a specific feature For example dialing 96 transfers a call X6004 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 53 Configuration PBX Feature code setting Black List On D E Block no ID On A a Call Forward On Call Forward IVR 4 zR ifii Call Forward Busy Off 9 Call Forward No Answer On 82 Call Forward No Answer IVR 84 Direct Pickup DND Off Follow Me On Group Pickup Voice Mail 72 8 3 8 N OF c Black List Off fs Block no ID Off fe Call Forward Off mo Call Forward Busy On o Call Forward Busy IVR 2z Call Forward No Answer Off 83 Call Transfer a6 DND On 78 DND IVR 80 Follow Me Off 23 Personal IVR Apply Reset 3 4 2 Using the Voicemail Feature Server Configuration SIP Server Feature Code B Feature Code The voicemail feature code as assigned in Section 3 4 1 on page 62 is Users can dial followed by their extension number to access their voicemail For example a caller from extension 1001 can dial 1001 to access voicemail messages Some IP phones allow you to configure automatic dialing of feature codes to perform common tasks The following figure shows the web configurator screen of ZyXEL s V300 IP phone ZyXEL s V300 IP phone can be configured to automatical
359. tings Latency delay of packet delivery This can cause echoes during a conversation Jitter variations in delay of packet delivery This could cause strange sound effects The X6004 utilizes a jitter buffer to minimize the effects of jitter Packet Loss packets are dropped due to an overwhelming amount of traffic on the network Some degree of packet loss will not be noticeable to the end user but as packet loss increases the quality of sound degrades The X6004 can be configured to change the priority field of IP packets for all outgoing RTP Real Time Protocol packets The X6004 supports Type of Service ToS and Differentiated Services Diffserv for implementing QoS Configure the X6004 with the QoS settings that your network uses for VoIP 9 1 1 ToS The X6004 supports the following classes of service for outgoing VoIP packets Minimize Delay Use this when the time it takes for a packet to travel from the source host to destination host latency is most important Maximize Throughput Use this when the volume of data transmitted in any period of time is important Maximize Reliability Use this when it is important that you have some certainty that the data will arrive at the destination without retransmission being required Minimize Cost Use this when it is important to minimize the cost of data transmission Network providers may offer two types of service for example fiber and copper and charge differ
360. tion 6 5 on page 89 to configure the X6004 s time and date Message This field states the reason for the log Source This field lists the source IP address of the incoming packet Destination This field lists the destination IP address of the incoming packet This is typically the LAN or WAN IP address of the X6004 Note This field displays additional information about the log entry 26 2 1 Filter Log Results Use this screen to filter the logs you want to view Click the Show Filter button in the View Log screen to bring up the log filter Figure 203 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log Show Filter View Log Logs Show Filter Display on Logs x Keyword Source Address Destination Address Search Total logging entries 0 30 7 entries per page Page 1 0 3 e Each field is described in the following table Table 105 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log Show Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Display Select a category of logs to view select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Setting page Refer to Section 26 1 on page 229 for more information on log categories Keyword You can filter the logs to only display log entries that match a string you enter in this field A string can be a word a number or a combination of words and numbers Type the string you want to search the logs for Source Address You can filter the logs to
361. tion of your syslog program for more details Log Category Select the categories of logs that you want to record The categories are All Logs all logs generated on the X6004 IPPBX all activities related to the PBX functions of the X6004 User administrator activity such as a successful login myZyXEL com service registration with the myZyXEL com website Default Selection Select which logs to send to this syslog server Choose one of the following options Disable All Logs Do not send any log events Enable Normal Logs Send all logs excluding debug events Debug logs are used by service technicians and development engineers Enable All Logs Send all logs Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the X6004 Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the Log Setting screen without saving your changes X6004 User s Guide 237 Chapter 26 System Log X6004 User s Guide Call Detail Record CDR This chapter shows you how to collect and manage Call Detail Records CDRs on the X6004 27 1 CDR Overview Call Detail Records CDRs are telephone records containing details such as the time of call duration of call source telephone number and so on The X6004 has a built in CDR database that automatically stores calls made to or from its extensions You can search the CDR database to find out details about the calls made within your organization You can also use an external data
362. to add this authority group to the X6004 If you are editing an existing authority group settings click Apply to save your changes to the X6004 Cancel Click this to go back to the main Authority Group screen without saving your changes 14 2 3 Authority Group Configuration Screen Use this screen to manage extensions in the authority groups Click the Advanced icon in the Authority Group screen to view the screen as shown X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group Figure 106 Authority Group Configuration Authority Group Peer List Group Name Description Delete p Dte 1003 1004 1002 default default extension group 1111 3333 SIP 3333 3333 Add SIP Peers add B edit f Delete 1111 Extension 1111 A Qiadd B iEdit Delete 1003 1003 g tj FXS 1004 1004 EP Ww FXS 1002 1002 di Cancel Each field is described in the following table Table 39 Authority Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Peer List Group Name This field displays the name of the authority group you are configuring Description This field displays the description given to the authority group you are configuring Add SIP Peers Click Add SIP Peers if you want to configure multiple extensions for IP phones connected to the X6004 SIP Peer FXS Peer The screen is divided into two sections the SIP Peer section shows you the extensions
363. to set up the LAN IP address of the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt Network gt LAN Figure 75 Configuration gt Network gt LAN LAN Ethernet TCP IP Settings IP Address 192 168 1 12 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 12 Configuration gt Network gt LAN LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN Ethernet The IP address you configured here is the SIP server IP address that the IP TCP IP Settings phones on your LAN connect to IP Address Enter the IP address of the X6004 on the LAN IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the LAN Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 6 3 WAN Configuration You can configure your connection to the ISP or the default gateway router as well as DNS server information This allows the X6004 to communicate with IP devices on the WAN 6 3 1 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa for instance the IP address of www zyxel com is 204 217 0 2 The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of any network device before you can access it The ISP or network administrator should tell you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you
364. tor account is created on the X6004 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 26 System Log Table 103 Log Severity continued SEVERITY ALERT LEVEL DESCRIPTION SENT INFO Information logs are created when normal events occur For NO example a successful creation of a SIP extension DEBUG Debugging logs are used by service and development engineers NO to monitor the operations of the X6004 It is recommended not to turn these logs on unless instructed by support technicians 26 2 View Log The web configurator allows you to look at all of the X6004 s logs in one location Click Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log to open the View Log screen Use this screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Setting screen see Section 26 3 on page 232 Options include logs about system errors and administrator logins The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills Click a column heading to sort the entries A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order Figure 202 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log View Log Logs Show Filter Display All Logs Email Log Now Refresh Clear Log Total logging entries 0 30 x entries per page Page 1 0 3 Le E time Category Message Source Destinations Note _ Each field is described in the following table Table 104 Report gt LOGS gt System Log gt View Log
365. tranet ZyStack Add Intranet IPv4 subnet in CIDR format 24 z example 192 168 1 0 24 Ada Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 ZyStack Add Intranet LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 subnetin Type the IP address which identifies this network and specify how many initial bits in CIDR format the IP address of a host must match The subnet is specified via CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing format The CIDR format is displayed as follows IP address number of matching initial bits in the IP address For example 192 168 1 0 24 indicates the range of IP addresses 192 168 1 0 192 168 1 255 with the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 See Appendix A on page 287 for more information on IP addresses and subnet masks Add Click Add to save your changes Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 23 5 ZyStack Status Use this screen to view the status of the ZyStack as well as perform network connectivity tests between X6004s Click Configuration gt ZyStack gt Status to view the following screen X6004 User s Guide 213 Chapter 23 ZyStack Figure 196 ZyStack Status Status Zystack Status List IPPBX 001 Localhost Master N A N A N A IPPBX 002 secondary Slave N A Ping N N A Refresh Zystack Add Failure Log ___ Machinero Serial FailReason cleartog
366. transmits details of the voice elements it used to make the synthesis Because the codec at the receiving end has the same list it can exactly recreate the synthesized audio signal G 729 provides good sound quality and reduces the required bandwidth to 8kbps X6004 User s Guide Chapter 14 Authority Group 14 1 2 Video Codecs Video codecs are used by video phones to compress the amount of information sent between two devices Video codecs encode video signals into digital signals and decode the digital signals back into video signals The X6004 does not perform any video coding it does support the passthrough of the following video codecs Table 35 Voice Codecs Supported CODEC DESCRIPTION H 261 This is an ITU International Telecommunication Union video coding standard H 261 was designed in 1990 and is considered the first practical video coding standard The data rate of the coding algorithm is able to operate between 40 kbps and 2 Mbps H 261 was targeted primarily to work over circuit switched networks and has since been superseded by more efficient video coding standards H 263 This video codec is based closely on the H 261 standard but as a general rule requires half the bandwidth to achieve the same quality video H 263 is capable of streaming video at bandwidths as low as 20 kbps to 24 kbps H 264 This video codec is video compression technology that falls under the MPEG 4 standard also known as MPEG
367. ttings Note The administrator account information is not saved during the backup process Restore Configuration File Path Enter the location of the file you want to upload or click Browse to find it Browse Click this to find the file you want to upload Upload Click this to restore the selected configuration file Do not turn off the X6004 while configuration file upload is in progress After the configuration file is uploaded successfully a message appears at the bottom of the screen Info Restore success Please restart the system Note You must restart the X6004 to apply the settings from the restored configuration file When you restore a configuration file on the X6004 you do not change the currently configured administrator accounts on the X6004 Back to Factory Defaults Default Click this to return the X6004 to its factory defaults 254 X6004 User s Guide Chapter 30 System File Maintenance 30 2 Firmware Upgrade Screen The X6004 accepts two kinds of firmware files The first type of file has a bin extension This type of file contains instructions on how the device drivers interact with the main processing unit of the X6004 In other words when you upload a new bin file you might not see any changes in the GUI of the X6004 but you may experience improved performance The second type of file has a rom extension This type of file contains functional inst
368. twork Address Translation NAT on the X6004 Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your X6004 that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your X6004 will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the X6004 unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situatio
369. u Enter the IP address of the second DNS server your ISP or network administrator provided to you If you were not provided one leave this field blank Secondary DNS Apply Click this to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value 6 4 DDNS Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to map your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you SIP IP phones can access the SIP server on the X6004 using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key X6004 User s Guide Chapter 6 Network Deployment 6 4 1 DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use Dynamic DNS 6 4 2 DDNS Configuration Use this screen to configure
370. u can also enter the IP address of the X6004 itself in which case the X6004 only collects information where the destination or source IP matches that of the X6004 Protocol Specify the protocol type which you want to capture information on You can choose TCP UDP ICMP or select All to capture all IP traffic going through the X6004 Stop capture after Specify how many packets you want to collect before ending the packet capture If Packets you select to limit the capture by the number of packets and by total time of the capture then the capture session will end when the time limit is reached Note You must specify either a time limit or a total number of packets limit for the data capture Stop capture after Specify how long a packet capture session should last If you select to limit the Sec capture by the number of packets and by total time of the capture then the capture session will end when the time limit is reached If you do not specify any limits for the capture then the capture will last for the maximum time allowed 600 seconds Note You must specify either a time limit or a total number of packets limit for the data capture X6004 User s Guide 251 Chapter 29 Diagnostics Table 119 Maintenance gt Administration gt Diagnostic gt Packet Capture LABEL DESCRIPTION Capture Now Click Capture Now to start collecting network traffic information from the X6004
371. u have to dial to call the extensions in this page group This number can be from 1 to 16 digits long Pincode Type the password you have to dial to call the extensions in this page group This number can be from 0 to 16 digits long and you can also use the key If you leave this field blank then callers do not have to dial a Pincode to call the extensions in this page group X6004 User s Guide Chapter 15 Ring Group Table 55 Add Edit Page Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Paging Time Type the maximum number of seconds that a person can page a group of extensions Description Type a description for this page group Extensions Move the extensions you want to be in this page group to the Selected Member column by highlighting them in the Peer Pool column and clicking the Right icon Remove the extensions you don t want to be in this page group from the Selected Member column by highlighting them and clicking the Left icon Apply Click Apply to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the Ring Group configuration page without saving your changes 15 2 5 Add Edit Hunt Group Screen The screens for editing or adding hunt groups on the X6004 contain the same fields Only the screen used to add hunt groups is shown below Click the Add or Edit icon in the Hunt section of the Ring Group configuration screen to view the s
372. u how to use the personal IVR system on the X6004 33 1 IVR Overview IVR is a phone technology that allows a computer to detect voice and touch tones using a normal phone An IVR system can respond with pre recorded audio prompts to further direct callers on how to proceed IVR systems can be used to control most functions where the interface can be broken down into a series of simple menu choices The X6004 has personal IVR system which allows users to edit some of their personal unique to each extension settings The IVR system on the X6004 allows users to Change their voicemail IVR and web phone PIN Configure their call forwarding and blacklist settings Configure their voicemail settings 33 2 Accessing IVR Users can access their personal IVR by dialing the feature code for IVR followed by their extension number The feature code for IVR is configured in the Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt Feature Code screen see Section 7 5 on page 100 For example if the feature code for IVR is an asterisk then a caller with extension 1001 must dial 1001 to access their personal IVR system Personal IVR can be accessed as an internal call or users can call from an outside line and dial the feature code for IVR followed by their extension when an auto attendant prompts them to dial the extension they wish to reach Users must authenticate before they can edit their configuration settings via IV
373. ued suner wask AUR T exer GENER 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 237 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting quUE Em Em EN EE EN HEHEHE HEHEHE n i I I Ti i Internet I b gt a n a I I Hi il 192 168 1 0 24 P a eee ee um um m um m m m m m um V You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B
374. uick Start Guide you must configure how the X6004 adjusts the signal volume sent to and received from a traditional PBX 7 3 1 Configure FXO Settings Use this screen to configure settings related to the FXO lines configured on the X6004 To access this screen click Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXO Figure 84 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXO FXO FXO Configuration FXO Configuration Machine 1p IPPBX 001 Slot sit B Port Port 3 z Speaking Volume Level 2 7 Listening Volume Level 2 7 Busy Detect Count 2 X Country Code Code usa zl Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 19 Configuration gt PBX gt Server Configuration gt SIP Server gt FXO LABEL DESCRIPTION FXO Use these fields to specify the FXO interface which you want to configure Configuration Machine ID Specify the X6004 for which you want to configure FXO settings This field is only configurable if you have more than one X6004 working in a ZyStack Slot Specify which FXO interface card you want to configure The cards are identified by the extension card slot they are installed in Select one of the slots or select All to make the settings the same for all FXO interface cards Port Specify the FXO port on the FXO interface card you want to configure Speaking Volume Select the volume level
375. unt group Office Hours Select the extensions that you want to be in this hunt group during the office hours period you configured for the X6004 See Chapter 13 on page 123 Move the extensions you want to be in this hunt group to the Selected Member column by highlighting them in the Peer Pool column and clicking the Right icon Remove the extensions you don t want to be in this hunt group from the Selected Member column by highlighting them and clicking the Left icon Night Service Select the extensions that you want to be in this hunt group in the off hours period not during office hours you configured for the X6004 See Chapter 13 on page 123 Move the extensions you want to be in this hunt group to the Selected Member column by highlighting them in the Peer Pool column and clicking the Right icon Remove the extensions you don t want to be in this hunt group from the Selected Member column by highlighting them and clicking the Left icon Apply Click Apply to save your changes and to apply them to the X6004 Cancel Click Cancel to go back to the Ring Group configuration page without saving your changes 15 2 6 Paging Group Example The following sections show you how to create page groups Paging groups are sets of extensions that can all be called at the same time by dialing a single number page group number When a page group number is dialed all of the extensions automatically pick up via sp
376. ur local telephone company The Default AA prompts the callers to dial the extension they would like to reach See Section 3 2 2 on page 52 for information on how to set up a dialing rule so that the extensions on your network can connect to the PSTN X6004 User s Guide 51 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 2 2 Dialing Rule for PSTN The following sections show you how to create outbound dialing rules also referred to as Least Cost Routing or LCR The LCRs determine which outside line the X6004 should use to complete outbound calls In our example we want to use the PSTN1 outbound line group to complete local calls Figure 31 Outbound Calls via PSTN local call NIER cS 1001 Procedure 1 Inthe web configurator click Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR to open the following screen Figure 32 Configuration gt PBX gt Outbound Line Management gt LCR Delete I Add Bf Edit f Delete C ezout easy to call out E B ii fa local_call local call LCR m E d Bu long distance call long distance call LCR E international call international call LCR Delete 2 Click the Edit icon in the local call section to open the following screen Select the outbound line group from the pool column that you want to add to this LCR in our example this is IPPBX 001 PSTNI as configured in Section 3 2 1 on page 49 then click the Right icon to move them to the Selected column Click Apply t
377. ured on the X6004 They are divided into the following categories FXO Trunk connections via the FXO ports to your local telephone company SIP Trunk connections to a SIP server at your VoIP provider Trusted Peer lines connections to a peer SIP device A peer SIP device could be another X6004 or another SIP server that allows you to use its services License These fields display the number of licenses you have for subscription services via myZyXEL com website The services are divided into the following categories Extension This is the number of SIP extensions you can configure on the X6004 softphone This is the number of ZyXEL s V100 softphones you can register with the X6004 Device Monitor This section is a graphical representation of the X6004 status and other X6004 in a ZyStack You can quickly view LED status voice interface card status and peer X6004 status You can also view additional basic information by moving your mouse cursor over the ZyXEL logo or the port graphics in the display Click on the on the ZyXEL logo to go to the status screen of the X6004 or click on the individual ports WAN LAN or interface card ports to go to their configuration screens X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator Table 10 Dashboard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured then this scre
378. utbound Line SIP Trunk Trusted Peer Extension softphone Hardware Information 527 56 256MB FXS j Trin 0 16 0 Device Monitor Le Flash HDD SIP FXS i Megew 1 w JN 50 Each field is described in the following table Table 10 Dashboard LABEL DESCRIPTION Refresh Interval Select how often you want to update the information in the Dashboard screen and click Refresh Now to apply your setting You can also click Refresh Now to update the screen immediately System Information This field displays the index number of the X6004 If you have a ZyStack configured then this screen displays information about all the X6004 in the ZyStack IP Address These two fields display the IP addresses of the of the WAN and LAN interfaces on the X6004 ZyStack This field displays Master if the X6004 is the master for all of the X6004s in a ZyStack This field also displays Master if this X6004 is set up as a stand alone IP PBX Slave if this X6004 is a slave in a ZyStack X6004 User s Guide Chapter 5 The Web Configurator Table 10 Dashboard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays On If the X6004 is powered on Off If this X6004 is not receiving power Backup By Displays the IP address of the X6004 that serves as the backup IPPBX for this X6004 only applicable in a ZyStack configu
379. values or user specified values for the ToS field in the IP header Voicemail The X6004 can store voicemail messages on the flash memory hard drive if installed or it can forward voicemail messages to individual end user email accounts Maximum voicemail length per message 90 seconds Maximum total voicemail length per user 300 seconds Static Route Static routes tell the X6004 how to forward VoIP traffic to remote networks Extension Management Manage extensions by placing them in authority groups You can then assign calling privileges to the authority groups The X6004 supports SIP client devices as well as traditional analog phones if an FXS interface card has been installed Auto attendant The X6004 supports up to 3 sets of auto attendant profiles to handle incoming calls Auto attendant helps guide incoming calls to their destination Audio Format for Auto Attendant G 711 format audio file wav law 8 bit mono mode Maximum size of a single message 600 kb Maximum size of all messages 10 Mb Outbound Line Groups The X6004 supports outbound lines via SIP connections to an ITSP trusted peer connections PSTN connections are also supported if an FXO interface card is installed LCR Least Cost Routing allows administrators to set up dialing rules and configure priorities for outbound lines used when users make phone calls Hunt Group Configure a group of user extensions which can be reac
380. ver to which you want to send your CDR files Password Type the password of the account set up on a remote server to which you want to send your CDR files Apply Click the Apply button to save your changes 27 3 Backup List Screen Use this screen to backup CDR files delete existing backups of CDR files and mail CDR files to an administrator email address Figure 209 Report gt LOGS gt CDR gt Backup List Backup List List Backup File List IPPBX_001 Bede HAZR Vv cdr 20070306173133 tgz Forward Delete Backup Now Each field is described in the following table Table 111 Report LOGS CDR Backup List LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup File List If you have a ZyStack configured using multiple X6004s then specify the X6004 for which you want to create a backup file of the CDRs Filename This column displays the names of the backup CDR files currently stored on the X6004 Use the check box on the left to specify which files you want to forward or delete The filename of the CDR takes the following format cdr Y YYYMMDDHHMMSS tgz Where cdr indicates this is a Call Detail Record file e YYYYMMDD is the year month and day indicating when the backup file was created HHMMSS is the time of the day indicating when the backup file was created in hour minute second format tgz indicates that this is a compressed That can be uncompressed using a compression utility
381. vided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major co
382. ving a signal Off The line is not connected X6004 User s Guide How It Works This chapter is an overview of different logical components and how they work together to route calls on the X6004 2 1 Call Routing The two main functions of any IP PBX are routing internal calls and handling calls to and from the outside world The following sections explain how these functions are performed on the X6004 2 1 1 Call Routing Terms The following are some terms related to ZyXEL s IP PBX implementation Extension This is a unique number assigned to each telephone connected to the X6004 Extensions are used to make calls between phones connected to the X6004 and to route calls from the outside world to their correct target Extensions fall into the following two groups SIP Extension This is an extension assigned to a SIP Session Initiation Protocol based IP phone connected to the X6004 Alternatively this could be an extension assigned to an analog phone which connects to the X6004 via a VoIP gateway device FXS Foreign Exchange Subscriber Extension This is an extension assigned to an analog phone directly connected to a port on an FXS interface card installed on the X6004 See Figure 5 on page 38 The FXS ports on the X6004 work the same way as the phone sockets in your home In your home you are a subscriber to the telephone services of your local telephone company and when you connect an analog
383. ward to next menu to forward a call to the next menu Repeat menu to replay the auto attendant audio file for this menu Return previous menu to go back to the previous menu for this auto attendant menu This option is not available in the initial auto attendant menu X6004 User s Guide Chapter 19 Auto Attendant Table 75 Add Edit Auto Attendant Option LABEL DESCRIPTION Extension Specify the extension you want to forward this call to This field is only applicable if you select Forward to an extension in the Action field Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to go back to the previous screen without saving your changes 19 4 4 Auto Attendant Night Service Settings Use this screen to configure Night Service settings for this auto attendant You only need to configure this screen if you want the auto attendant to perform different actions outside of regular office hours Click the Night Service tab in the Advanced screen of an auto attendant to view the screen as shown BES Only the screen for the initial auto attendant menu is shown In the sub menu screens some of the fields are not available Figure 165 Auto Attendant Menu Settings Night Service Options Night Service Auto Attendant Office Hour NewAA Night Service Audio File Upload Audio File State Dial Extension Number Enable C Disable Forward to a specifi
384. where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works hereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions a You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and b You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and c You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and X6004 User s Guide Appendix B Open Software Announcements d If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Wo
385. xtend a standard service subscription Service License Refresh Click this button to renew service license information such as the license key registration status and expiration date 31 4 License Status Use this screen to view the registration status of your subscription services Click Maintenance gt License Control gt License Status to open the screen as shown next Figure 222 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service License Status License Status Machine ID IPPBX_001 Unregistered Extension Number 16 Soft Phone Number Each field is described in the following table Table 125 Maintenance gt License Control gt Service LABEL DESCRIPTION License Status Machine ID This field displays the name automatically assigned to the X6004 as well as the registration status Unregistered or Registered of the X6004 Service This field displays the name of the service available on the X6004 Quantity This field displays the number of licenses you have registered for a each service X6004 User s Guide PART V Web Portal and IVR Web Portal 265 I tive Voice Response IVR System 275 Web Portal This chapter shows you how to use the web portal to make calls via the web phone and manage settings for individual users 32 1 Web Portal Overview The web portal is a HTML based phone as well as a management tool t
386. yStack Failsafe This field displays the machine ID of the X6004 that has taken over the functions of an X6004 that has failed For example if it displays IPPBX 003 then it means that IPPBX 002 has failed and IPPBX 003 has taken over ZyStack Add This table is a list of log entries regarding successful and unsuccessful attempts to Failure Log add X6004s to the ZyStack Machine ID This field displays the system name of the X6004 The system name is automatically assigned to the X6004 based on when it was added to the ZyStack IPPBX 01 is always the master followed by slaves IPPBX 02 IPPBX 03 and so on Serial This field displays the serial number that was entered when trying to add this X6004 to the ZyStack X6004 User s Guide Chapter 23 ZyStack Table 97 ZyStack Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fail Reason This field displays the reason for not being able to add an X6004 to the ZyStack The field displays Timeout if the master X6004 was unable to establish a connection with the X6004 that wanted to join the ZyStack Wrong Master if the X6004 is already a member of another ZyStack Wrong Slave if an incorrect serial number was entered when adding this X6004 to the ZyStack Clear Log Click the Clear button to erase the ZyStack log X6004 User s Guide 215 Chapter 23 ZyStack X6004 User s Guide PART IV Monitor Log amp Maintenance System Information 21
387. your Dynamic DNS settings To access this screen click Configuration gt Network gt DDNS Figure 77 Configuration gt Network gt DDNS DDNS Type Basic Setting DDNS Type Username Password Domain name wildcard Interface Mail Exchanger Dons e m a optional Apply Reset Each field is described in the following table Table 14 Configuration gt Network gt DDNS LABEL DESCRIPTION DDNS Type Select the type of service that you are registered for with your Dynamic DNS service provider User Name Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Domain name Type the domain name assigned to your X6004 by your Dynamic DNS provider You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma Enable Wildcard Option Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard Interface This field displays the interface registered to use DDNS services On the X6004 it always displays WAN Mail Exchanger Use this field if the mail exchange server in your organization has a dynamically assigned IP address and you have not already registered it with a Dynamic DNS provider Enter the domain name of your mail exchange server Apply Click this to save your changes Reset Click this to set every field in this screen to its last saved value X6004 User s Guide Chapter 6 Network Deployment
388. yright c 1989 Carnegie Mellon University All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE BES This Product includes ntp 0 9 4 software under the NTP License NTP License Copyright c David L Mills 1992 2004 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The University of Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express

ZyXEL Communications X6004 Telephone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents